Home

Pioneer SC-67 User's Manual

1. 108 Professional Calibration EQ graphical output eeeeeeeee esee eeee eren enne nnne 109 Br 109 i cpei Kaosgis Me X MA 109 52 Rer H I C 110 PA d rior ror e 110 USB Ite FE OC Bo us isses crues EN EEE EE Ga PEDE unas DETE SEED Oaa E 111 lim P 111 NOD OF a s usse n RNE AE TION M KU EPIS nU UN QU a UDIN ENECUREFRV A URN UNSER RPIU HE ES RN 111 USB DAC uoce uie elec III MEL IE 113 lores 113 Wireless LAN M nnmnnn nnne 113 Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions If you think that there is something wrong with this component check the points below Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercis ing the checks listed below ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work e fthe unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnec
2. HU 5 mV 47 KQ Uu 400 mV 47 KQ 87 5 MHz to 108 MHz Tor 15 Q unbalanced EDS 530 kHz to 1700 kHz rcm REEL EEUDE Loop antenna balanced eee 1 Vp p 75 Q DREAM Y 1 0 Vp p 75 Q PB PR 0 7 Vp p 75 Q T 1080p 1125p Video convert off 19 pin Not DVI 5 V 55 mA EEA USB2 0 High Speed Type A 5 V 2 1 A nce USB2 0 High Speed Type B USB and Video Composite 5 V 100 mA nem 5 V 600 mA UIS RO TRUNV UE TURA NURSE g 3 5 Mini jack MONO MUERE High Active High Level 2 0 V m g 3 5 Mini jack MONO EE REPE IRI LORD 12 V Total 150 mA mn 9 pin cross type female female EE 5 V 150 mA T 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX mom MS 0 1 W HDMI Setup Control OFF 0 3 W HDMI Setup Control ON 435 mm W x 185 mm H x 441 mm D 17 1 8 in W x 7 1 4 in H x 17 3 8 in D 17 8 kg 39 2 Ib V 17 5 kg 38 6 Ib Additional information Number of Furnished Parts CIC ING caine c 1 Remote control UTI PR E 1 AAA size IEC aC MOINS TTE TEE OIL 2 lore Ee cbe E TT Tm 1 MAL s de NNI INNER 1 ex fo STR ES RESI RT cT 1 FM wire antenna Ne 1 Power cord CD ROM AVNavigator Quick start g
3. cese 71 Cautions on the Control with HDMI function Lees esses eere eere eene nnne nennen nnn 72 Control with HDMI function About the Control with HDMI function Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI compatible Pioneer TV or Blu ray Disc player are pos sible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable e The receiver s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV s remote control he receiver s input switches over automatically when the TV s input is changed or a Control with HDMI compatible component is played e The receiver s power is also set to standby when the TV s power is set to standby amp Important e With Pioneer devices the Control with HDMI functions are referred to as KURO LINK e You cannot use this function with components that do not support Control with HDMI e We only guarantee this receiver will work with Pioneer Control with HDMI compatible components However we do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components that support the Control with HDMI function e Use a High Speed HDMI cable when you want to use the Control with HDMI function The Control with HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used e For details about concrete operations settings etc refer to also the operating instructions for each component
4. Es MULTI ZONE setup using speaker terminals ZONE 2 Either the surround back or the front wide speaker terminals can be used as the speaker terminals for ZONE 2 For details see Determining the speakers application on page 19 1 Connecta pair of speakers to the surround back or front wide speaker terminals 2 Connecta TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver e COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images he GUI screen is not displayed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected To use the front wide speaker terminals for ZONE 2 Sub zone ZONE 2 Main zone M FRONTWIDE a Connecting your equipment Secondary MULTI ZONE setup ZONE 3 MULTI ZONE setup using HDMI terminal ZONE 4 1 Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT jacks on this receiver You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration amp Important 2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT jack on this receiver HDMIIN 6 and IN 7 cannot be selected for ZONE 4 In the same way inputs for which HDMI IN 6 or IN 7 is assigned cannot be selected ene MeN Zone e To use the ZONE 4 functions set Control or Control Mode in HDMI Setup to OFF For details see HDMI Setup on page 70 Connect a separate receiver to the HDMI ZONE 4 OUT jack on this receiver Connect speaker
5. eeeeeeeeee eere eene 85 Direct iU treno E EET ERI Lo 85 Setting the backlight mode ssc P 85 About the ALL ZONE STBY All Zone Standby and DISCRETE ON Discrete On functions 85 Resetting the remote control settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene e nenne nennen nn nnn nnn n nnn n unns 86 Controlling COMPONENTS is naa ccc accesses acces ccs esae Can Esser accent eee 86 Controlling the rest of your system About the Remote Setup menu The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing RCU SETUP The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below For their setting procedures refer to the explanations for the respective items What it does Preset codes can be set for the various input functions The remote control codes of a number of other devices including products of other brands are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated See Selecting preset codes directly on page 83 If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes the remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 84 This is a setting for changing only the remote control unit s operation screen without changing the receiver s input when the remote control unit s input function buttons are pressed This is co
6. s 110 ANNI VO WO MN TUTO Um 149 te NT IBISe TRITT TTE ney rarer Eye enn ee narrate nT nen ne ener Nerina snr 111 o 111 RENOIR RR TETTE 111 BR ortpr2cg P rE 113 judo outdo aobe hese 113 Virele SS LAN ETC BIS Flow of settings on the receiver Flow for connecting and setting the receiver The unit is a full fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals It can be used eas ily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings Required setting item 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 Setting to be made as necessary 6 8 10 11 12 13 amp Important The receiver s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator CD ROM included with the receiver In this case virtually the same connections and settings as in steps 2 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 can be made interactively For instructions on using AVNavigator see About using AVNavigator included CD ROM on page 10 1 Before you start e Checking what s in the box on page 8 e Loading the batteries on page 9 i 2 Determining the speakers application page 19 A 9 2 channel surround system Front height Front wide connection B 7 2 channel surround system amp Speaker B connection C 7 2 channel surround system amp Front Bi amping connection
7. 118 WINGOWS 118 j e 118 Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats 119 Speaker Setting Guide or 119 About messages displayed when using network functions esee 120 Important information regarding the HDMI connection eeeeeeee eene eene nenne 121 ETA AL Ne a eee een ee Smee Sete ee ene Pe eee nes eee meee ae ne eee ee 121 Preset code NSE e D 128 Additional information Surround sound formats Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you ll find on BDs DVDs satellite cable and terrestrial broadcasts and video cassettes Dolby The Dolby technologies are explained below See http www dolby com for more detailed information I DOLBY TRUEZJT PRO LOGIC IIz Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic Surround EX and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS The DTS technologies are explained below See http www dts com for more detailed information dts Master Audio dts Neo X Manufactured under license under U S Patent No s 5 956 674
8. Operating multiple receivers Up to four receivers can be operated discretely using this receiver s remote control when using multiple receiv ers provided they are of the same model as this receiver The receiver to be operated is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting e Set the remote modes on the receivers before using this function see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 102 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 4 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the number button for the receiver Receiver 1 to Receiver 4 you wish to operate For example to operate Receiver 2 press 2 If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash the setting has been successfully completed When the preset code is input the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed Setting the remote to control other components Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons such as DVD or CD using the compo nent s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote However there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using If you can t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control yo
9. Making Control with HDMI connections You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and other components e Be sure to connect the TV s audio cable to the audio input of this unit When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections if the TV supports the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal so there is no need to connect an audio cable In this case set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON see HDMI Setup on page 70 For details see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 30 amp Important e When connecting this system or changing connections be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket After completing all connections connect the power cords to the wall socket After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins You cannot carry out any operations during this process The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF you can skip this process For details about the Control with HDMI feature see Control with HDMI function on page 69 e To get the most out of this function we recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver e The Control with HDMI
10. Router A device for relaying data flowing on a network to another network In homes routers often also function as DHCP servers Products with built in wireless LAN access points are called wireless LAN routers DHCP Abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol for automatically assigning such setting infor mation as IP addresses within network connections This offers convenience in that when enabled it allows network functions to be used simply by connecting the devices to the network Wireless LAN Wi Fi Wi Fi Wireless Fidelity is a trademark coined by the Wi Fi Alliance trade association to increase recognition of wireless LAN standards With the increase in the number of devices connected to computers in recent years Wi Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wire less connection As a way of reassuring users products that have passed interoperability tests carry the logo Wi Fi Certified to indicate that compatibility is assured WPS Abbreviation of Wi Fi Protected Setup A standard established by the Wi Fi Alliance industry group for a function allowing settings related to interconnection of WPS compatible wireless LAN devices and encryption to be made with simple operations There are a number of methods including push button configuration and PIN code con figuration This AV receiver supports both push button configuration and PIN code con
11. The batteries included with the unit are to check initial operations they may not last over a long period We rec ommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life 1 7 warnine e Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place such as inside a car or near a heater This can cause batteries to leak overheat explode or catch fire It can also reduce the life or perfor mance of batteries A CAUTION Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting Observe the following precautions e Never use new and old batteries together e nsert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case e Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages Do not use different batteries together e When disposing of used batteries please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public insti tution s rules that apply in your country area Operating range of remote control unit The remote control may not work properly if e There are obstacles between the remote control and the receiver s remote sensor e Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor e The receiver is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays e The receiver is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit About using AVNavigator included CD ROM The include
12. After pressing ENTER test tones will be output 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels 12 0 dB as necessary Use to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker When it sounds like both tones are the same volume press to confirm and continue to the next channel e For comparison purposes the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select e f you want to go back and adjust a channel simply use ft 4 to select it 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Fine Speaker Distance e Default setting 10 00 all speakers For proper sound depth and separation with your system it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time You can adjust the distance of each speaker in half inch increments The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 98 1 Select Fine SP Distance from the Manual MCACC setup menu 2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary Use to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel From the listening position face the two speakers w
13. Aiwa 1005 Alienware 1017 American High 1004 Asha 1002 Audio Dynamics 1000 Audiovox 1003 Bang amp Olufsen 1032 Beaumark 1002 Bell amp Howell 1001 Calix 1003 Candle 1002 1003 Canon 1004 Citizen 1002 1003 Colortyme 1000 Craig 1002 1003 Curtis Mathes 1000 1002 1004 Cybernex 1002 CyberPower 1017 Daewoo 1005 DBX 1000 Dell 1017 DIRECTV 1016 1020 1022 1023 1024 1027 1030 1031 Dish Network 1029 Dishpro 1029 Durabrand 1018 Dynatech 1005 Echostar 1029 Electrohome 1003 Electrophonic 1003 Emerson 1003 1004 1005 Expressvu 1029 Fisher 1001 Fuji 1004 Funai 1005 CD Pioneer 5000 5011 5070 AKAI 5043 Asuka 5045 Denon 5019 Fisher 5048 Goldstar 5040 Hitachi 5042 Garrard 1005 Gateway 1017 GE 1002 1004 GOI 1029 Goldstar 1000 1003 Gradiente 1005 Harley Davidson 1005 Harman Kardon 1000 Headquarter 1001 Hewlett Packard 1017 HNS 1016 Howard Computers 1017 HP 1017 HTS 1029 Hughes Network Systems 1016 1020 1022 1023 1024 Humax 1016 1020 Hush 1017 IBUYPOWER 1017 Instant Replay 1004 JC Penney 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 JCL 1004 JVC 1000 1001 1020 1029 Kenwood 1000 1001 Kodak 1003 1004 LG 1003 Linksys 1017 Lloyd s 1005 LXI 1003 Magnavox 1004 1018 Magnin 1003 Marantz 1000 1001 1004 Marta 1003 Media Center PC 1017 MEI 1004 Memorex 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1018 1019 MGN Technology 1002 Kenwood 5020 5021 5031 Luxman 5049
14. DTS The DTS technologies are explained below See http www dts com for more detailed information DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a 5 1 channel audio coding system from DTS Inc now widely used for DVD Video DVD Audio 5 1 music discs digital broadcasts and video games DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data preserving audio quality DTS HD High Resolution Audio A high definition audio technology by which signals can be transferred over HDMI cables DTS ES DTS ES the ES stands for Extended Surround is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS ES Discrete 6 1 and DTS ES Matrix 6 1 encoded sources DTS Neo X DTS Neo X can generate 11 1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source such as video or TV and from 5 1 channel sources THX The THX technologies are explained below See http www thx com for more detailed information THX Cinema A mode for playing in a home theater environment the sound tracks of theater movies that have been recorded and edited for playback in large spaces such as movie theaters THX Music A mode adjusted mainly for listening to music that has been masterized at a higher level than movie sound tracks THX Games A mode for playing the sound of games with spatial fidelity In many cases the sound is mixed in the same way as for movies but thi
15. EFFECT H GAIN Height Gain V SB Virtual Surround Back lt j gt What it does Some audio sources include ultra low bass tones Set the LFE attenu ator as necessary to prevent the ultra low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB which is the recommended value When set to 5 dB 10 dB 15 dB or 20 dB the LFE is limited by the respective degree When OFF is selected no sound is output from the LFE channel The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it s too strong You can use this if you find that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear distortion in the sound The attenuator isn t available with digital sources or when using the Stream Direct ANALOG DIRECT modes Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range during digital processing Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver amp or through to a TV When THROUGH is selected no sound is output from this receiver This feature automatically corrects the audio to video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left s
16. Operating Instructions ELITE AV Receiver mee lt O f IMPORTANT A The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol CAUTION CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The exclamation point within an equilateral within an equilateral triangle is intended to TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC triangle is intended to alert the user to the alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR presence of important operating and dangerous voltage within the product s BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS maintenance servicing instructions in the enclosure that may be of sufficient shock to persons WARNING This equipment is not waterproof To prevent a fire or shock hazard do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment such as a vase or flower pot or expose it to dripping splashing rain or moisture D3 4 2 1 3 A1 En WARNING Before plugging in for the first time read the following section carefully The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage e g 230 V or 120 V written on the rear panel D3 4 2 1 4 A1 En WARNING To prevent a fire hazard do not place any naked flame sources such as a lighted candle on the equipment D3 4 2 1 7a A1 En VENTILATION CAUTION
17. the IR receiver s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel 1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver Closet or shelving unit Non Pioneer component IR receiver 2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger You can connect components in your system such as a screen or projector to this receiver so that they switch on or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input function However you must specify which input func tions switch on the trigger using the he Input Setup menu on page 47 Note that this will only work with compo nents that have a standby mode OUTPUT 12V TOTAL 150 mA MAX Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to the 12 V trigger of another component Use a cable with a mono mini plug on each end for the connection After you ve specified the input functions that will switch on the trigger you ll be able to switch the component on or off just by pressing the input function s you ve set on page 47 A Note e tis also possible to have the component switch not when the input function is switched but when HDMI OUT is switched For details see HDMI Setup on page
18. 0 0 to 10 0 frames PCM sources Please select another input signal if this is a problem DELAY soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture By adding a 1 second 30 frames AUTO Sound Delay bit of delay you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of NTSC DRC Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized the video Default 0 0 Bunnies antoi for Dolby Digital DTS Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS HD and MAX TONE Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source or bypasses BYPASS lt d gt AA uen teenie uM ing to surround sound at low volumes Tone Control them completely ON OFF BASS ern 4 610 6 dB gt Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized ON dos J Default 0 dB Loud Mgmt for a o i need to use this feature when listening to IREE PEA ouda s enagerieni surroun sound at low vo umes GER pid Adjusts the amount of treble Default 0 dB This can only be set when DRC is set to OFF and the input signal is a Dolby TrueHD signal Using other functions Setting LFE LFE Attenuate A ATT Analog input attenuate SACD GAIN lt e gt HDMI HDMI Audio lt f gt A DELAY Auto delay lt g gt C WIDTH Center Width Applicable only when using a center speaker lt h gt DIMENSION lt h gt PANORAMA lt h gt C GAIN Center Gain Applicable only when using a center speaker lt j gt
19. 10 Switching the HDMI output page 80 4 11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired e Using the various listening modes page 57 e Better sound using Phase Control oage 61 e Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control page 61 e Measuring the all EQ type SYMMETRY ALL CH ADJ FRONT ALIGN page 90 e Changing the channel level while listening page 99 e Switching on off the Acoustic Calibration EQ Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement page 74 e Setting the PQLS function page 71 e Setting the Audio options page 74 e Setting the Video options page 76 4 12 Other optional adjustments and settings e Control with HDMI function page 69 e The Advanced MCACC menu page 89 e The System Setup and Other Setup menus page 97 4 13 Making maximum use of the remote control e Operating multiple receivers page 83 e Setting the remote to control other components page 83 Before you start Checking what s in the DOX acca cases Secs eee eee enews 8 COUP BIOS OINY 8 PO ACUI i s 8 installing the POC IY CN oscunsasou sees crue EE SINN CURES EDI UNE V UIN END EEE Er 9 Loading the batteries oci tese ekde isi lass necis ois aspeR es er I ee NE PERS 9 Operating range of remote control unit eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eese e eene e nennen nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn
20. 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 487 535 6 226 616 7 212 872 7 003 467 7 272 567 7 668 723 7 992 195 7 930 184 7 933 929 7 548 853 7 283 634 amp other U S and worldwide patents issued and pending DTS HD the Symbol amp DTS HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks amp DTS HD Master Audio is a trademark of DIS Inc Product includes software DTS Inc All Rights Reserved About THX The THX technologies are explained below See http www thx com for more detailed information In case of SC 68 OE ULTRA 2 PLUS SURROUND EX In case of SC 67 THX the THX logo Ultra2 Plus and Select2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd which are registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by THX Ltd THX grew from George Lucas personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack in both movie theatres and in your home theatre as faithful as possible to what the director intended Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and condi tions This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc VHS tape DVD etc and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately tra
21. High quality surround 7 2 channel surround system Surround back amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone D E 7 2 channel surround system Front height Front wide amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone F 5 2 channel surround system amp Front Bi amping connection High quality surround amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone G 5 2 channel surround system amp ZONE 2 ZONE 3 connection Multi Zone H 5 2 channel surround system amp Speaker B Bi amping connection I 5 2 channel surround system amp Front and Surround Bi amping connection High quality surround J 5 2 channel surround system amp Front and Center Bi amping connection High quality surround 4 3 Connecting the speakers Placing the speakers on page 22 e Connecting the speakers on page 22 Installing your speaker system on page 24 e Bi amping your speakers on page 23 4 4 Connecting the components e About the audio connection on page 29 e About the video converter on page 29 e Connecting your TV and playback components on page 30 e Connecting AM FM antennas on page 36 e Plugging in the receiver on page 43 4 ae 5 Power On 4 6 Changing the OSD display language OSD Language page 45 4 7 MCACC speaker settings e Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 4 8 The Input Setup menu page 47 When using connections other than the recommended connections 4 9 Basic playback page 49 4
22. If a crest of a wave meets a trough then the sound will be out of phase and an unreliable sound image will be produced e For discs created with standards other than Phase Control the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place Phase Control Plus function corrects for phase shifting on such discs For instructions on setting the Phase Control Plus see Setting the Audio options on page 74 If your subwoofer has a phase control switch set it to the plus sign or 09 However the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer Set the built in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off If this cannot be done on your subwoofer set the cutoff frequency to a higher value If the speaker distance is not properly set you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases When headphones are plugged in When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page Ls Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions that correct phase distortion and group delay Phase Control and Full
23. PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S A DE C V Blvd Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico D F 11000 TEL 55 9178 4270 K002 B3 En http www pioneerelectronics ca Canada 2012 PIONEER CORPORATION All rights reserved lt ARB7487 A gt
24. Use to access the Home Menu pages 45 47 70 90 and 98 e RETURN Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen 8 17 4 ENTER Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system see page 90 and the Audio or Video options page 74 or 76 9 FEATURES buttons These let you operate the receiver s features directly e PHASE Press to switch on off Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control page 61 e PQLS Press to select the PQLS setting page 71 e Hi Bit Press to switch on off the Hi Bit 32 setting page 74 e D FILT Press to select the AUDIO DAC Digital Audio Converter digital filter type page 4 10 MULTI ZONE select buttons Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 ZONE 3 and ZONE 4 page 79 11 Remote control LED Lights when a command is sent from the remote control 12 RECEIVER Switches the remote to control the receiver used to select the white commands Switch to perform operations in the main zone Also use this button to set up surround sound 13 VOLUME Use to set the listening volume 14 MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also restores the sound 15 amp LIGHT Press to turn on off the illumination for the buttons The way the buttons light can be selected from four modes page 85 Controls and displays 6789 10 1112 13 HDMI DIGITAL 17 1819 20 1 Signal indicators 14 15 21 Light
25. When the display shows the names of folders and files you re ready to play from the USB device OY Note If an Over Current message lights in the display the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this receiver Try following the points below e Switch the receiver off then on again e Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off e Use a dedicated AC adapter supplied with the device for USB power If this doesn t remedy the problem it is likely your USB device is incompatible Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 1 below is 9 e Note that non Roman characters in the playlist are displayed as 7 1 Use f to select a folder then press ENTER to browse that folder e To return to the previous level any time press RETURN 2 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play then press gt to start playback e Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver e DRM protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver Basic playback controls This receiver s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices e Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod USB operation mode E D I gt m Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device e Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone 1 Use f to select a folder then pr
26. and the power turns off The receiver suddenly power off or ADVANCED MCACC flashes FAN STOP is displayed then iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks Display blinks 12V TRG ERR Remedy Allow the unit to cool down in a well ventilated place before switching back on see Installing the receiver on page 9 Check whether the cables used to connect the speakers are short circuited Wait at least 1 minute then try turning the power on again The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue Lower the volume level The power unit is damaged Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer autho rized independent service company The built in cooling fan is malfunctioning Do not try switching the receiver on Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks Reconnect accurately then turn the power back on No sound Symptom No sound is output when an input function is selected No sound is output from the front speakers No sound from the surround or center speakers No sound from surround back speakers No sound from front height or front wide speakers Remedy Check the volume mute setting press MUTE and speaker setting press SPEAKERS Make sure the correct input function is selected Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected Make sure the correct input signal
27. if there are not enough system active No sound or sound suddenly Check that the HDMI Audio setting is set to AMP Setting the Audio options on page 74 resources available ceases If the component is a DVI device use a separate connection for the audio Installation of AVNavigator may fail Try the following in the order indicated because of incompatibilities with 1 If there are any other applications active exit the other If analog video is being output over HDMI please use a separate connection for the other applications applications and try to start install again D EN 2 If that does not work try restarting your PC then start Check the audio output settings of the source component install with no other applications active HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized Due to this interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback Turning on off the device connected to this unit s HDMI OUT terminal during playback or disconnecting connecting the HDMI cable during playback may cause noise or inter rupted audio Causes Symptom AVNavigator does not inter The receiver s power is not turned act well with the receiver on The receiver or computer is not con nected to the LAN The router s power is off AVNavigator s network settings are not correct Network connections could be restricted due to the computer s net work settings
28. radio stations The Network functions cannot be operated with the buttons on the remote control Causes The audio file currently being played back was not recorded in a format playable on this receiver The LAN cable is currently discon nected There is heavy traffic on the network with the Internet being accessed on the same network When in the DMR mode depending on the external controller being used playback may be interrupted when a volume operation is performed from the controller There is a connection routed through a wireless LAN on the same network In case of Windows Media Player 11 You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with Windows XP or Windows Vista installed In case of Windows Media Player 12 You are currently logged onto the domain through your PC with Windows 7 installed The firewall settings for components on the network are currently in operation You are currently disconnected from the Internet The broadcasts from an Internet radio station are stopped or inter rupted The remote control is not currently set to the Network function mode FAQ Remedies Check whether the audio file was recorded in a format sup ported by this receiver Check whether the folder has been damaged or corrupted Note that there are cases where even the audio files listed as playable on this receiver cannot be played back or displayed page 68 Connect the LAN cable prop
29. security settings etc When the operating instructions interactive mode is changed the settings may not be transferred to the browser causing AVNavigator to stop interacting When the Wiring Navi Operation Guide Interactive Manual Glossary or Software Update is launched a warning about security protection appears on the browser This is because of the browser s security function Operation Guide does not display properly Adobe Flash Player 10 is not installed or its version is too old Software updating does not operate well There may be a problem with your Internet Service Provider s network USB interface Symptoms Causes The folders files stored ona The folders files are currently stored USB memory device are not in a region other than the FAT File displayed Allocation Table region The number of levels in a folder is more than 9 The audio files are copyrighted Remedy Turn the receiver s power on Wait about 60 seconds after the power turns on for network functions to start After this press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver Connect a LAN cable to the receiver or computer page 40 After this press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver Turn the router s power on After this press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver If your router does not support DHCP or UPnP the receiv er s IP address must be set in AVNavigator
30. setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the SYMMETRY ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings THX Speaker only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting Select YES when using THX speakers all speakers other than the front speakers are set to SMALL In other cases leave at NO e STAND WAVE Multi Point only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro amp S Wave In addition to measurements at the listening position you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves This is useful if you want to get a balanced flat calibration for sev eral seating positions in your listening area Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on screen and note that the last microphone placement will be at your main listening position 3rd reference point cal 2nd reference emi Main listening position 3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone SETUP MIC i h Microphone SC 67 Nt
31. switched on and the volume turned up If your subwoofer has a sleep function make sure it is switched off Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS see Speaker Setting on page 99 The crossover frequency may be set too low try setting it higher to match the characteris tics of your other speakers see Speaker Setting on page 99 If there is very little low frequency information in the source material change your speaker settings to Front SMALL Subwoofer YES or Front LARGE Subwoofer PLUS see Speaker Setting on page 99 Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF or to a very quiet setting see Setting the Audio options on page 4 Check th Check the AMP setting Set it to ON when you want to output sound from all the speakers Setting the Audio options on page 74 Check the speaker connection see Connecting the speakers on page 22 Check th Check th The channel may not be recorded in the source By using one of the advanced effect tening modes you may be able to create the missing channel see Enjoying various e speaker level settings see Channel Level on page 99 No sound from the speakers No sound from one speaker e speaker level settings see Channel Level on page 99 at the speaker hasn t been set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 99 list types of playback using the listening modes on page 58 Sound is produced from analog Check that the input signal t
32. 0010 JCB 0002 Jensen 0004 0006 JVC 0007 0010 0044 Kawasho 0002 0004 0006 KEC 0104 Kenwood 0004 0006 0100 KLH 0106 Kloss Novabeam 0008 0012 KTV 0008 0100 0104 0110 LG 0005 0052 0078 0097 Logik 0001 Luxman 0004 0006 LXI 0000 0006 0101 0102 Magnavox 0004 0006 0019 0020 0037 0042 0100 0101 Majestic 0001 Marantz 0004 0006 0062 0100 0101 Maxent 0087 0107 Megapower 0097 Megatron 0006 Memorex 0001 0005 0006 0041 MGA 0004 0005 0006 0100 Midland 0010 0011 0099 Mintek 0091 Mitsubishi 0004 0005 0006 0014 0045 Monivision 0097 Montgomery Ward 0001 Motorola 0003 0014 MTC 0004 0005 0006 0100 Multitech 0008 0104 0110 NAD 0006 0102 NEC 0003 0004 0005 0006 0100 Net TV 0107 Nikko 0006 0100 Norcent 0060 Olevia 0048 0054 0059 Onwa 0008 0104 Oppo 0095 Optimus 0105 Optoma 0075 Optonica 0014 Orion 0025 Panasonic 0003 0010 0017 0027 0105 0114 Penney 0100 0102 Philco 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0100 0101 Philips 0003 0004 0007 0019 0020 0101 Philips Magnavox 0019 Pilot 0004 0100 Polaroid 0057 0106 Portland 0004 0005 0006 Prima 0065 Princeton 0097 Prism 0010 Proscan 0000 Proton 0004 0006 0007 Protron 0055 Proview 0068 Pulsar 0004 0011 0099 Quasar 0003 0010 0105 Radio Shack 0100 0104 Radio Shack Realistic 0000 0004 0006 0007 0008 RCA 0000 0003 0004 0005 0006 0013 0024 0035 Realistic 0100 0104 Runco 0
33. 14 5 Remote sensor Receives the signals from the remote control page 10 Pioneer ADVANCED MCACC FL OFF O O O INPUT MASTER SELECTOR VOLUME 6 MASTER VOLUME dial 7 Front panel controls To access the front panel controls catch the sides of the door with your fingers and pull forward 8 AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio options page 74 9 1 1 TUNE PRESET ENTER Use the arrow buttons when setting up your Home Menu Use TUNE f 4 to find radio frequencies and use PRESET amp to find preset stations page 54 10 VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video options page 76 11 MULTI ZONE controls If you ve made MULTI ZONE connections page 37 use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone page 79 12 SPEAKERS Use to change the speaker terminal page 78 13 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL Change the receiver s input to the iPod and enable iPod operations on the iPod page 51 14 Listening mode buttons e AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT Switches between Auto Surround page 58 Auto Level Control Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode page 60 e HOME THX Press to select a Home THX listening mode page 59 15 TUNER controls e BAND Switches between AM and FM radio bands page 54 e TUNER EDIT Use with TUNE 4 PRESET and ENTER to memorize and name stations for recall page 54 16 HOME MENU Use to access the Home Menu pages 45 47 70 90 and 98 17 R
34. 1ch SP B Bi Amp is selected for the Speaker System setting page 98 and the Speaker B Link setting HDMI Setup on page 70 is turned on the setting of the played speaker terminals switches automatically when HDMI OUT is switched The settings switch as follows e HDMI OUT ALL Switches to SP A B ON Sound is output simultaneously in the room where the A speakers are located and in the room where the B speakers are located e HDMI OUT 1 Switches to SP A ON Sound is only output in the room where the A speakers are located e HDMI OUT 2 Switches to SP B ON Sound is only output in the room where the B speakers are located Checking your system settings Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel process ing and your current MCACC preset 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode then press STATUS to check the system settings The front panel display shows each of the following settings for three seconds each Input Source gt Sampling Frequency gt MCACC preset gt ZONE 2 input gt ZONE 3 input gt ZONE 4 input gt HDMI OUT 2 When you re finished press STATUS again to switch off the display Using other functions Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all the receiver s settings to the factory default Use the front panel controls to do this Set MULTI ZONE to MULTI ZONE OFF e Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device from the rece
35. 2011 2015 2031 2044 2068 Sansui 2066 Sanyo 2066 2083 Sharp 2035 Sherwood 2063 Shinsonic 2086 Sonic Blue 2087 Sony 2003 2004 2010 2012 2027 2046 2047 2048 Sungale 2054 Superscan 2067 Sylvania 2023 2067 2091 Symphonic 2023 Teac 2070 Technics 2068 Theta Digital 2078 Toshiba 2001 2006 2049 2066 2076 Trutech 2000 Urban Concepts 2076 US Logic 2086 Venturer 2070 Xbox 2077 Yamaha 2005 2068 Zenith 2019 2076 2082 2087 If operations are not possible using the preset codes below you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD DVR BDR HDR JVC 2290 2291 2293 2294 2295 2296 LG 2286 2287 Marantz 2302 2303 Mitsubishi 2300 2301 Pioneer 2034 2192 2255 2250 2259 2260 2281 Denon 2310 2311 2312 Hitachi 2307 2308 2309 DVR BDR HDR Onkyo 2289 Panasonic 2277 2218 2219 Philips 2280 Samsung 2282 Sharp 2304 2305 2306 Sony 2283 2284 2285 2292 Toshiba 2288 2262 Yamaha 2297 2298 2299 If operations are not possible using the preset codes below you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the DVD BD Pioneer 2078 2099 2107 2260 2261 2264 2265 2266 2109 2144 2193 2194 2195 2270 2196 2251 2258 2259 Panasonic 2263 2269 Sharp 2267 2215 Sony 2268 2211 2212 2213 2216 Toshiba 2274 VCR Pioneer 1035 1108 ABS 1017 Adventura 1005
36. 2026 2068 Advent 2072 Desay 2055 Aiwa 2012 DiamondVision 2042 Akai 2066 Disney 2022 Alco 2070 Durabrand 2090 Allegro 2087 Emerson 2067 2082 2091 Amphion MediaWorks Enterprise 2082 2037 ESA 2053 2091 AMW 2037 Fisher 2083 Apex 2002 2018 2079 2080 Funai 2091 Apple 2058 GE 2016 2077 2080 Arrgo 2088 GFM 2043 Aspire 2073 Go Video 2087 Astar 2052 Gradiente 2068 Audiovox 2070 Greenhill 2080 Axion 2040 Haier 2094 Bang amp Olufsen 2081 Harman Kardon 2030 2084 Blaupunkt 2080 Hitachi 2011 Blue Parade 2078 Hiteker 2079 Boston 2059 iLive 2062 Broksonic 2066 Ilo 2038 California Audio Labs 2068 Initial 2038 2080 CambridgeSoundWorks Insignia 2036 2064 2091 2065 Integra 2078 CineVision 2087 iSymphony 2060 Coby 2029 JBL 2084 Curtis Mathes 2089 JVC 2013 Kawasaki 2070 Kenwood 2028 2068 CyberHome 2000 2088 Cytron 2039 BD KLH 2070 2080 Koss 2024 2069 2075 Landel 2093 Lasonic 2085 Lenoxx 2074 2090 LG 2019 2051 2061 2082 2087 Liquid Video 2075 Liteon 2025 2092 Magnavox 2067 2076 2091 Memorex 2066 Microsoft 2077 Mintek 2038 2080 2086 Mitsubishi 2020 Nesa 2080 Next Base 2093 Nexxtech 2056 Onkyo 2076 Oppo 2041 2057 Oritron 2069 2075 Panasonic 2005 2007 2017 2032 2033 2050 2068 2076 Philips 2045 2076 Proceed 2079 Proscan 2077 Qwestar 2069 RCA 2008 2016 2070 2077 2078 2080 Regent 20 4 Rio 2087 Rowa 2071 Samsung 2009
37. 6113 6038 6054 6060 6059 6102 6103 6030 6114 Primestar 6032 Proscan 6110 6111 Proton 6020 RadioShack 6002 6111 6032 Radix 6036 RCA 6002 6110 6111 6113 6109 6061 6114 Saba 6014 Sagem 6041 6120 Samsung 6070 6113 6091 6043 6017 6114 6093 Sanyo 6046 Sat Cruiser 6015 Schwaiger 6066 Siemens 6007 6036 SKY 6042 6059 6030 6031 SM Electronic 6011 Smart 6051 Sonicview 6055 6107 Satellite Set Top Box SAT PVR Combination Bell ExpressVu 6002 6003 DirecTV 6070 6110 6062 6113 6060 6058 6114 6115 6116 Dish Network System 6002 6089 Cable Set Top Box Pioneer 0297 6028 6029 6095 6099 6325 6328 6329 ABC 6122 Accuphase 6122 Amino 6077 6078 Auna 6082 BCC 6072 Bell amp Howell 6122 Bright House 6074 6029 Dishpro 6002 6089 Echostar 6002 6089 6003 Expressvu 6002 Hughes Network Systems 6113 6114 60115 6116 JVC 6003 Cable One 6074 6029 Cablevision 6074 6029 Charter 6074 6029 6058 Cisco 6029 6028 6083 Comcast 6074 6029 1982 Cox 6074 6029 Digeo 6029 6058 Director 6073 Emerson 6122 Motorola 6032 Philips 6113 6114 Proscan 6110 Samsung 6114 Sonicview 6055 6107 Sony 6062 Fosgate 6072 General Instrument 6073 6072 6122 Homecast 6024 i3 Micro 6077 Insight 6074 6073 6029 Jebsee 6122 Jerrold 6073 6072 6122 Knology 6029 Sony 6062 6063 6030 Star Choice 6032 Star Trak 6032 TechniSat 6033 Thomson 6110 6111 6014 Tivo
38. Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using Ihe Advanced MCACC menu on page 89 or The system Setup and Other Setup menus on page 97 e Depending on the characteristics of your room sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm 5 inches will end up with different size settings You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 98 e The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position This set ting should be accurate taking delay and room characteristics into account and generally does not need to be changed e f Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and view ing environment we recommend adjusting the settings manually Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup too much background noise echo off the walls obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone the final settings may be incorrect Check for household appliances air conditioner fridge fan etc that may be affecting the environment and switch them
39. Before making these settings you should have already completed Automatically con ducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 You only need to make these settings once unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers A CAUTION e The test tones used in the Manual MCACC setup are output at high volume amp Important e Press the MCACC button while the pertinent setup screens are displayed to select MCACC presets e For some of the settings below you ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu before you connect the microphone to this receiver e See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 46 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference e f you re using a subwoofer switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position 1 Select Manual MCACC from the Advanced MCACC menu See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 90 if you re not already at this screen 2 Select the setting you want to adjust If you re doing this for the first time you might want to make these settings in order e Fine Channel Level Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system see Fine Channel Level on page 92 e Fine SP Distance Make precise delay settings for your speaker system se
40. Marantz 5033 Onkyo 5017 5018 5030 5050 Panasonic 5036 Philips 5022 5032 5044 Additional information Microsoft 1017 Mind 1017 Mitsubishi 1010 Motorola 1004 MTC 1002 Multitech 1002 1005 NEC 1000 1001 Nikko 1003 Niveus Media 1017 Noblex 1002 Northgate 1017 Olympus 1004 Optimus 1002 Orion 1014 1019 Panasonic 1004 1008 Philco 1004 Philips 1004 1011 1016 1020 1022 1023 1024 1025 Philips Magnavox 1011 Pilot 1003 Proscan 1030 Pulsar 1018 Quarter 1001 Quartz 1001 Quasar 1004 Radio Shack 1003 Radio Shack Realistic 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 Radix 1003 Randex 1003 RCA 1002 1004 1007 1016 1020 1022 1030 1031 Realistic 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 ReplayTV 1026 Ricavision 1017 Runco 1018 Samsung 1002 1016 1022 1024 RCA 5013 5029 Roadstar 5052 Sharp 5051 Sony 5012 5023 5026 5027 5028 5039 TEAC 5015 5016 5034 5035 5097 Sanky 1018 Sansui 1014 1019 Sanyo 1001 1002 Sears 1001 1003 1004 Sharp 1012 Shogun 1002 Singer 1004 Sonic Blue 1026 Sony 1006 1009 1017 1021 Stack 1017 STS 1004 Sylvania 1004 1005 Symphonic 1005 Systemax 1017 Tagar Systems 1017 Tandy 1001 Tashiko 1003 Teac 1005 Technics 1004 Teknika 1003 1004 1005 Tivo 1016 1020 1021 1022 1025 TMK 1002 Toshiba 1015 1017 1028 Totevision 1002 1003 Touch 1017 UltimateTV 1031 Unitech 1002 Vector Research 1000 Video Concepts 1000 Videosonic 1002 Vie
41. PERSONAL INJURY EXCEED 10 00 THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF IHE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IF ANY APPLICABLE AUTHORITY HOLDS ANY PORTION OF THIS SECTION TO BE UNENFORCEABLE THEN LIABILITY WILL BE LIMITED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW oupported file formats vary by server As such files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit Playback with NETWORK features About playback behavior over a network e Playback may stall when the PC is switched off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content e fthere are problems within the network environment heavy network traffic etc content may not be displayed or played properly playback may be interrupted or stalled For best performance a 100BASE TX connection between player and PC is recommended e f several clients are playing simultaneously as the case may be playback is interrupted or stalled e Depending on the security software installed on a connected PC and the setting of such software network connection may be blocked Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and or the NETWORK features due to communica tion error malfunctions associated with your network connection and or your PC or other connected equipment Please contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider Windows Media V is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation This product includes technology owned
42. The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a cross industry organization of consumer electronics comput ing industry and mobile device companies Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1 5 When aPC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player some setting changes of software or other devices may be required Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information DLNA M the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks service marks or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance Content playable over a network e Even when encoded in a compatible format some files may not play correctly e Movie or Photo files cannot be played back here are cases where you cannot listen to an Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a list of radio stations e Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used For more information check with the manufacturer of your server Disclaimer for Third Party Content ACCESS TO THIRD PARTY CONTENT SERVICES INCLUDING ALL ASSOCIATED FEATURES AND FUNCTIONALITIES IS PROVIDED AS IS AS AVAILABLE AN
43. The driver software is provided on the included CD ROM AVNavigator USB DAC IN A Note e This unit cannot be used to play audio files from a PC unless Media Player is installed on the connected PC Connecting your equipment Connecting to a wireless LAN Wireless connection to the network is possible through a wireless LAN connection Use the separately sold AS WL300 for connection e Use only the furnished accessory connecting cable e Certain settings are required to use a wireless LAN converter AS WL300 For instructions on making these settings see the operating instructions included with the wireless LAN converter AS WL300 LAN 10 100 DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN OUTPUT BV 0 6 AMAX Internet Wireless LAN converter AS WL300 Connecting an IR receiver If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone you can use an optional IR receiver such as a Niles or Xantech unit to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver e Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window e Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology Refer to the manual that came with your com ponent to check for IR compatibility e f using two remote controls at the same time
44. This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio video synchronizing capability lipsync for HDMI If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable set A DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually For more details about the lipsync feature of your display contact the manufacturer directly Only when listening to 2 channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music Dolby Pro Logic Il Music mode Only when listening to 2 channel sources in Neo X CINEMA MUSIC GAME mode You can t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo Front Stage Surround Advance Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected e You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO or if 7 1ch Front Bi Amp or 7 1ch ZONE 2 is selected at Speaker System It can also be used when 7 1ch Speaker B is selected at Speaker System and SP gt A B ON is selected with the SPEAKERS button You can t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo Front Stage Surround Advance Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO It can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information You
45. To update select OK The updating screen appears and updating is performed e he power turns off automatically once updating is completed Software Update messages Status messages Descriptions Try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB device or storing the update file again If the error still occurs try using a different USB memory device FILE ERROR No update file was found on the USB memory device Store the file in the USB memory device s root directory UPDATE ERROR 1 to UPDATE ERROR 7 Turn the receiver s power off then turn it back on and try updating the software again If this message flashes updating has failed Update via a USB memory device Put the update file on a USB memory device and connect the device to the USB port When the file is found software updating starts automatically Update via USB UE11 UE22 UE33 Updating has failed Use the same procedure to update the software again The System Setup and Other Setup menus ZONE Setup The volume setting and tone for the sub zones that can be used with this receiver can be changed and adjusted here A CAUTION e Note that when Volume Level is set to 0 dB Fixed the audio output from the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals is set to the maximum Also depending on the volume setting on the connected amplifier large volumes may be produced even when Volume Level is set to 40 dB Fixed 1 Select ZONE Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select ZO
46. Tripod If you have a tripod use it to place the microphone so that it s about ear level at your normal listening position If you do not have a tripod use some other object to install the microphone e t may not be possible to measure correctly if the microphone is placed on a table sofa etc 4 When you re finished setting the options select START then press ENTER 5 Follow the instructions on screen 6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup Try to be as quiet as possible while it s doing this e With error messages such as Too much ambient noise or Check microphone select RETRY after check ing for ambient noise see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 46 and verifying the mic connection If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply select GO NEXT and continue e Do not adjust the volume during the test tones This may result in incorrect speaker settings 7 If necessary confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen The configuration shown on screen should reflect the actual speakers you have If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically In this case you don t need to select OK and press ENTER in step 8 e f you see an ERR message
47. and hold TUNE for about a second The receiver will start searching for the next station stopping when it has found one Repeat to search for other stations e Manual tuning To change the frequency one step at a time press TUNE e High speed tuning Press and hold TUNE for high speed tuning Release the button at the frequency you want Improving FM sound If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak press MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast Using the noise cut mode The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM broadcasts Press MPX to select the noise cut mode 1 16 2 Tuning directly to a station Press TUNER to select the tuner Use BAND to change the band FM or AM if necessary Press D ACCESS Direct Access Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station For example to tune to 106 00 FM press 1 0 6 0 0 If you make a mistake halfway through press D ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and start over mh WN Saving station presets If you often listen to a particular radio station it s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time This receiver can memorize up to 63 stations stored in seven banks
48. and tone characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the multi channel sound The three major elements in positioning the speakers are distance angle and orientation the direction in which the speakers are pointing Distance The distance of all the speakers should be equal Angle he speakers should be horizontally symmetrical Orientation The orientation should be horizontally symmetrical In most homes however it is not possible to achieve this environment For the distance on this receiver it is pos sible to automatically correct the speaker distance electrically to a precision of 1 cm 0 5 inch using the Full Auto MCACC Setup function page 45 Step 1 Speaker layout and distance adjustment Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers are steady and leave at least 10 cm 4 inches from the surrounding walls Position the speakers attentively so that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the listening position center of the adjustments We recommend using cords etc when adjusting the layout Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant from the listening position 7 Note e f the speakers cannot be set at equal distances on a circle use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to make them equalize the distance artificially Step 2 Adjusting the speaker height Adjust the heights angles of the different speakers Adjust so that t
49. are output e SP OFF No sound is output from the speakers When you select 7 1ch Speaker B you can select from e SP AON Sound is output from the A speaker terminals up to 9 channels including front height channels depending on the source e SP BON Sound is output from the two speakers connected to the B speaker terminals Multichannel sources will not be heard e SP A B ON Sound is output from the A speaker terminals up to 7 channels depending on the source the two speakers connected to the B speaker terminals and the subwoofer The sound from the B speaker termi nals will be the same as the sound from the A speaker terminals multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels e SP OFF No sound is output from the speakers When you select 7 1ch FH FW ZONE 2 you can select from e SP FH FW ON Front height or front wide channels are added to the front center and surround channels maximum 5 channels and a maximum of 7 channels are output The front height and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal e SP FH ON Front height channels are added to the front center and surround channels maximum 5 chan nels and a maximum of 7 channels are output e SP FWON Front wide channels are added to the front center and surround channels maximum 5 chan nels and a maximum of 7 channels are output e SP OFF No sound is output from the speakers When you select 5
50. by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing Inc Microsoft Windows 7 WindowsSVista WindowsSXP Windows 2000 Windows Millennium Edition Windows 98 and WindowsNT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries About playable file formats The NETWORK feature of this receiver supports the following file formats Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats Also the compatibility of file formats var ies depending on the type of server Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server e nternet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment and in this case play back may not be possible even with the file formats listed here Music files Category MP3 lt a gt WAV WMA AAC FLAC lt c gt Extension mp3 Wav wma m4a aac 3gp De flac Stream MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 LPCM WMA2 7 8 9 lt b gt MPEG 4 AAC LC MPEG 4 HE AAC aacPlus v1 2 FLAC Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling frequency Quantization bitrate Channel Bitrate VBR CBR Sampling fre
51. can t use the Virtual Wide mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the stereo Front Stage Surround Advance Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected You can only use the Virtual Wide mode if the surround speakers are on and the FW setting is set to NO It can also not be used when playing signals containing actual front wide channel information m You can t use the Virtual Depth mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or Stream Direct modes is selected n When Speaker System is set to 7 1ch Front Bi Amp 5 1ch Bi Amp ZONE 2 5 1ch F Surr Bi Amp or 5 1ch F C Bi Amp the AMP setting is locked at ON and cannot be changed Using other functions Setting the Video options There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu The defaults if not stated are listed in bold amp Important e Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu it is unavailable due to the current source setting and status of the receiver e All ofthe setting items can be set for each input function e Setting items other than V CONV can only be selected when V CONV is set to ON 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode then press VIDEO PARAMETER 2 Use f 4 to select the setting you want to adjust Depending on the current status mode of the receiver certain options may not be able to be selected Check the ta
52. center front right surround right surround left and subwoofer channels This additional channel provides the opportu nity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth spacious ambience and sound localiza tion than ever before Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at http www dolby com Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo when in the THX Surround EX mode faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5 1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener Boundary Gain Compensation Depending on the listener s and the subwoofer s position the listener may experience an excessive bass effect This feature compensates for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect This feature is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX Ultra2 Select2 specifications THX Loudness Plus Description THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control tec
53. control s settings to the factory default This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes see Setting the remote to control e When preset codes are set all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared This function is other components on page 83 for more on this Use the input function buttons to select the component convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 0 for three seconds SOURCE Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash 2 Press and hold the ENTER button for three seconds If the LED lights for one second the erasing has been successfully completed Default preset codes Input function button Preset code BD 2255 DVD 2256 DVR BDR 2251 HDMI 2034 TV 0305 CD 5000 SAT CBL 6325 TV CONTROL INPUT 0305 TV and Audio Video components HDD BDR Button s TV TV Monitor BD DVD DVR VCR SAT CATV bsart POWERON POWERON POWERON POWERON POWERON POWERON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Number buttons CLR ENTER CLASS e dot KURO LINK CH ENTER CH ENTER EXIT INFO EXIT TOOLS GUIDE t V e t t e s ENTER HOME MENU HOME MENU RETURN RETURN numerics CLEAR ENTER ENTER ENTER TOP MENU TOP MENU EU LIST lt a gt titers t je t e ENTER HOME MENU HOME MENU RETURN RETURN t ie ENTER HOME MENU RETURN AUTO SETUP FREEZE
54. displayed superimposed over the video output on the display This status display can be turned off by switching this setting to OFF e Default setting ON 1 Select On Screen Display Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the On Screen Display setting you want 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu OG Note e The on screen display is not displayed for video outputs from the HDMI OUT 2 and VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals e The on screen display is not displayed when the video output resolution is 480i 576i or 4K e The size of the characters displayed differs according to the output resolution The System Setup and Other Setup menus Multi Channel Input Setup SC 68 only You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi channel input Also when the multi channel input is selected as an input function you can display the video images of other input functions In the Multi Channel Input Setup you can assign a video input to the multi channel input 1 Select Multi Ch In Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the SW Input Gain setting you want OdB Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level originally recorded on the source e 10dB Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level increased by 10 dB 3 Select the Video Input setting you want When the multi channel input is selected as an input function you can display the video images of other input functions
55. do not output these frequencies Be sure to operate within 7 m 23 ft and a 30 angle of the remote sensor on the front panel see Operating range of remote control unit on page 10 Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote able sound is output for display Sens r FAQ Symptom Remedy Symptom Remedy Other components can t be operated Ifthe battery ran down the preset codes may have been cleared Re enter the preset Noisy or distorted picture Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal during scanning for example with the system remote codes or the video quality may just be poor with some video game units for example The a a a a a SERERE EEUU MR picture quality may also depend on the settings etc of your display device Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection component or composite then start playback again The preset code may be incorrect Redo the procedure for entering preset codes When commands from the remote control units of other devices are registered using the learning function in some cases they may not be learned properly In this case register the commands again using the learning function see page 84 If they still do not work they may be in a special format that can
56. e X1 Pro Logic IIx GAME THX GAMES e Neo X GAME THX GAMES e X1 Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT THX CINEMA X1 Pro Logic IlZ HEIGHT THX MUSIC X1 Pro Logic IlZ HEIGHT THX GAMES With multichannel sources press THX HOME THX repeatedly to select from e THX CINEMA e THX MUSIC e THX GAMES e THX Surround EX Allows you to hear 6 1 or 7 1 channel playback with 5 1 channel sources e Neo X CINEMA THX CINEMA e Neo X MUSIC THX MUSIC e Neo X GAME THX GAMES DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX CINEMA X1 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX MUSIC e X1 Pro Logic IlZ HEIGHT THX CINEMA X1 Pro Logic IlZ HEIGHT THX MUSIC X1 Pro Logic IlZ HEIGHT THX GAMES Listening to your system Using the Advanced surround effects The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks but some modes are also suited for music sources Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode 2 Press ADV SURR ADVANCED SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode ACTION Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of dialog e SCI FI Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects e MONO FILM Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks e ENT SHOW Suitable for musical sources EXPANDED Creates an extra wide stereo field TV SURROUND P
57. eee eee dioec EUR ee E Controls and displays Remote control This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver RECEIVER ALL ZONE STBY SOURCE DISCRETE ON 1 DE 2 3 CO RCU SETUP BDR zare oll 4 t C9 C89 e n USB CBL Cer Conr Cc Ros INPUT SELECT STATUS o L_ 12 5 INPUT VOLUME TV CONTROL C 1 3 6 14 7 8 iPod CTRL FEATURES 9 as sacs wan 57 BAND PTY JC JC PRESET TUNE AUTO ALC HX A DIRECT STANDARD ADV SURR Favorite O AUT SIGNAL SEL MCACC CHLEVEL S RTRV SPEAKERS DIMMER SLEEP ce JE D ACCESS HDMI OUT CLASS 2 a De re or LIGHT 10 1 z21 z 4 r 15 Pioneer RECEIVER The remote has been conveniently color coded according to component control using the following system White Receiver control TV control e Blue Other controls See pages 51 52 54 55 and 86 1 RECEIVER This switches between standby and on for this receiver 2 ALL ZONE STBY DISCRETE ON Use this button to perform unique operations page 85 3 RCU SETUP Use to input the preset code when making remote control settings and to set the remote control mode page 83 4 Input function buttons Press to select control of other components page 83 Use INPUT SELECT gt to select the input function page 50 5 Receiver Control buttons Press RECEIVER first t
58. for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is the lossless encoding technology developed for high definition optical discs in the upcoming era Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is the audio technology for all high definition programming and media It combines the effi ciency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high definition era Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Digital Surround EX the EX stands for EXtended is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left right channels for 6 1 channel playback This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5 1 channel decoding as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby Pro Logic decoding system Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail Dolby Pro Logic liz Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontally oriented sound field The height channel strengthens the sound field s sense of three dimensionality and air producing presence and expansion
59. for some models e his receiver has been developed and tested for the software version of iPod iPhone iPad indicated on the website of Pioneer http pioneer jp homeav support ios na Installing software versions other than indicated on the website of Pioneer to your iPod iPhone iPad may result in incompatibility with this receiver e iPod iPhone and iPad are licensed for reproduction of non copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce e Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting e Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure e When listening to a track on the iPod in the main zone it is possible to control the sub zone but not to listen to a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone 1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV See Connecting an iPod on page 40 About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup e tis also possible to operate the iPod on the iPod itself without using the TV screen For details see Switching the iPod controls on page 51 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod USB When the display shows the names of folders and files you re rea
60. function can be used with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal but not with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal HDMI Setup You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMI compatible compo nents in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function For more information see the operating instruc tions for each component 1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU 2 Select System Setup then press ENTER 3 Select HDMI Setup then press ENTER 4 Select the Control setting you want Choose whether to set this unit s Control with HDMI function ON or OFF You will need to set it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function set this to OFF e ON Enables the Control with HDMI function Set Control Mode ARC and PQLS in the subsequent setting items to the desired values Also by setting this to ON the Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link functions can be operated automatically by connecting a player supporting the respective functions See Setting the Audio options on page 74 for details on Sound Retriever Link Setting the Video options on page 76 for details on Stream omoother Link e OFF The Control with HDMI is disabled The Control Mode ARC and PQLS functions in the subsequent setting items cannot be used 5 Select the Control Mode setting you want C
61. harmonic distortion ene ee teca Ru a uen REY Dti Ua FEY EGu hu RR PR den Oni ce ab ERU 0 04 96 1 kHz 130 W 130 W 8 Q Guaranteed speaker TOBISCO TI penne ener rte eer et er nen MD ao TIER ene eee ene TELA IUE EIE 4Q to 16Q Audio Section Input Sensitivity Impedance use PN Tuner Section Frequency Range FM TM Antenna Input FM crn Frequency Range AM vp Antenna AM uus eerie rri ih EEEE Video Section Signal level Composite do ONT T o TREE Component VICE O uda eme ttr rasta rad ined er ad d Corresponding maximum resolution ComMponent i o RENE Digital In Out Section HDMI terminal NI TE oO 0 S TESTI mi e ne P aie 9 RERO TT HDMI input MHL terminal ues erotic tiet pra d a ile vr rts USB terminal EE USB terminal 96 99 only asansucnaseweiinvoesnsedaad Er ERR be ERE HR tutta iPod terminal TTE SS ADAPTER PORT terminala WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER terminal u c aora et Integrated Control Section Control R terminal NE e TETTE MIS Vl E E ate cesta EPUM IEEE ti Ceeesvan CURE ETUR REIS IFTE 12 V Trigger TEC AG saicdinsontesstinvcengnnneniagatisteeuadanaoadetn nen cnntataparnnts 12 V Tigger CUTOUT TYD Eireann a n RS 232C cable type MENOR EXTENSION Te PING NETTEN Network Section LAN termina NRI TUENTUR Miscellaneous PowerreguiremneNi Senami e nr rT een ee aba Power consumpto wea ey ME nemus Cis malti opt Utente nd LF stana Ori T Banco eu mE Weight without package 0r
62. input signal corresponding to the source component Each press cycles through the options as follows e AUTO he receiver selects the first available signal in the following order HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG ANALOG Selects an analog signal e DIGITAL Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal e HDMI Selects an HDMI signal When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH the sound will be heard through your TV not from this receiver When set to DIGITAL HDMI or AUTO only selected DIGITAL or HDMI the indicators light according to the signal being decoded see Display on page 14 Listening to your system Better sound using Phase Control This receiver s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the listening position in phase preventing unwanted distortion and or coloring of the sound Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an opti mal sound image The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound Sources Press PHASE PHASE CONTROL to switch on phase correction The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights OY Note e Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction If two waveforms are in phase they crest and trough together resulting in increased amplitude clarity and presence of the sound signal
63. instead of a name e Once you have named a station preset you can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency Basic playback Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music Device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology Digital music player Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device B uetooth audio transmitter Digital music player sold commercially J c Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device cell phone Music data Bluetooth This receiver ete Remote control Per operation N 7 LL BJ f 3 O Z O e LE e About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup Wireless music play When the B uetooth ADAPTER AS BT100 or AS BT200 is connected to this unit a product equipped with bluetooth wireless technology portable cell phone digital music player etc can be used to listen to music wire lessly Also by using a commercially available transmitter supporting B uetooth wireless technology you can listen to music on a device not equipped with B uetooth wireless technology The AS BT100 and AS BT200 models supports SCMS T contents protection so music can also be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS T type bluetooth wireless technology he Air Jam function cannot be used with the AS BT100 Remote control operation The remote control supplied
64. is selected press SIGNAL SEL Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected you won t be able to hear any other signal format see Setting the Audio options on page 74 Check that the source component is connected properly see Connecting your equipment on page 18 Check that the speakers are connected properly see Connecting the speakers on page 22 Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn t selected select one of the surround listening modes see Enjoying various types of play back using the listening modes on page 59 Check that the surround center speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 99 Check the channel level settings see Channel Level on page 99 Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 22 Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL and the surround speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 99 Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 22 If only one surround back speaker is connected make sure it s connected to the left channel speaker terminal Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL and the surround speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 99 Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 22 Symptom Remedy No sound from subwoofer Check that the subwoofer is connected properly
65. it does Option s V HEIGHT When you re not using front height speakers selecting this mode OFF Virtual Height allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front lt k gt speakers ON When you re not using front wide speakers selecting this mode OFF V WIDE allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel through your front Virtual Wide speakers lt gt This improves the continuity of the sound from the front channel to ON the surround channels OFF V DEPTH When this mode is selected the sound field expands virtually to MIN Virtual Depth behind the display resulting in a sound field with the same depth as lt m gt the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence MID MAX This is set to turn power amplifier sections off and use channels ON exclusively in the pre amp mode Select ON to use the power ampli Front OFF fiers for all channels Select Front OFF to turn off the front channel s AMP power amplifier and use the front channel exclusively in the pre amp FAC OFF lt n gt mode F amp C OFF to turn off the front and center channels power amplifiers and use the front and center channels exclusively in the OFF pre amp mode To turn the power amplifiers for all channels off and use them exclusively in the pre amp mode select OFF a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON b When ON is selected the Sound Retriever effect is optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents input to the
66. more detailed MCACC setup e Manual MCACC Fine tunes your speaker settings and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ see Manual MCACC setup on page 92 e Demo No settings are saved and no errors occur When the speakers are connected to this receiver the test tone is output repeatedly Press RETURN to cancel the test tone Automatic MCACC Expert If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 you can customize your setup options below You can calibrate your sys tem differently for up to six different MCACC presets which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TV amp Important e Make sure the microphone speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup he screen saver will automatically appear after five minutes of inactivity A CAUTION e The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume 1 Select Auto MCACC from the Advanced MCACC menu then press ENTER If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed refer to Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 90 2 Select the parameters you want to set Use f to select the item then use to set e Auto MCACC The default is ALL recommended but you can limit the system calibration to only on
67. night OPTIMUM SURR n the Optimum Surround mode this receiver automatically optimizes sound balance in each scene based on actually set volume The sound balancer controls three major theater sound elements dialogue bass and surround with original algorithm B Note e When ALC is selected the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 74 Standard surround sound The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources 1 Press RECEIVERI to the receiver operation mode 2 While listening to a source press STANDARD STANDARD SURROUND If necessary press repeatedly to select a listening mode e fthe source is Dolby Digital DIS or Dolby Surround encoded the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display e f the surround back speakers are not connected OO Pro Logic IIx becomes LXI Pro Logic Il 5 1 channel sound With two channel sources you can select from OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to movie sources OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to music sources OO Pro Logic IIx GAME Up to 7 1 channel sound surround back especially suited to video games e OO PRO LOGIC 4 1 channel surround sound sound from the surround speakers is mono e OO Pro Logic lliz HEIGHT Up to 9 1 channel sound surround back and f
68. nn 10 About using AVNavigator included CD ROM ereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nnne n nnn nnn nnns 10 Before you start Checking what s in the box Please check that you ve received the following supplied accessories e Setup microphone cable 5 m 16 4 ft e Remote control unit AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries to confirm system operation x2 AM loop antenna FM wire antenna e iPod cable e MHL cable Power cord e CD ROM AVNavigator e Quick start guide e Safety Brochure e Warranty sheet Our philosophy Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater listening experience as close as possible to the vision of the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they created the original soundtrack We do this by focusing on three important steps 1 Achieving the highest possible sound quality 2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area 3 Fine tuning the receiver with the help of world class studio engineers With the cooperation of AIR Studios this receiver has been designated AIR Studios Monitor AIR STUDIOS MONITOR Features Class D Amplifier This unit is an AV receiver developed based on the latest high performance Class D amplifier and integrating the essence of Pioneer s high sound quality designs This new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding performance with high sound quality and reproduces the latest in multi chan
69. off if necessary If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display please follow them e Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone If this seems to be happening switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup Basic Setup The Input Setup menu You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings see Input function default and possible settings on page 47 In this case you need to tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you ve connected e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT terminal and the TV s HDMI input are con nected with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings 1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select System Setup from the Home Menu 3 Select Input Setup from the System Setup menu 4 System Setup 4b Input Setup ANN RECEIVER AN RECEIVER a Manual SP Setup Input DVD gt b Input Setup Input Name n Rename OFF c OSD Language Inp
70. on pag Dialog Enhancement See Setting the Video options on page 76 See Setting the Audio options on page 74 Auto Power Down See Ihe Other Setup menu on page 102 Internet radio See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 65 USB DAC See Playing music from a PC on page 54 vTuner See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 65 DLNA See About network playback on page 66 AirPlay See Using AirPlay on iPod touch iPhone iPad and iTunes on page 64 Wireless LAN See Connecting to a wireless LAN on page 42 Additional information Specifications Amplifier section Continuous average power output 10 140 W per channel 539 H 190 W SC 68 180 W SC 67 per channel Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission s Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers 1 kHz with no more than 0 08 total harmonic distortion 1 kHz with no more than 1 total harmonic distortion Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer Multi channel simultaneous power output 1 kHz 1 96 8 Q SOIN Sb itp DEREN GEH Up Mud EIN betel eee a 810 W SC 68 770 W SC 67 Continuous Power Output 1 kHz 8 Q 0 08 906 ace MNT a a 140 W 140W EIN RN 140 W ce P P 140 W 140 W SUO und Da ERIT ETT TOS 140 W 140 W musei UNM INNS MTM 140 W 140
71. on the front page 47 panel or the INPUT SELECT button Check the HDMI Input assignment in the Input Setup menu then try OFF see The Input on the remote control Setup menu on page 47 There seems to be a time lag See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 to between the speakers and the output set up your system again using MCACC this will automatically compensate for a delay in of the subwoofer the subwoofer output The maximum volume available Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF see Volume Setup on page 102 shown in the front panel display is lower than the 12dB maximum The channel level setting may be over 0 0dB When Operation Mode is set to Basic the Pioneer recommended settings are made and not all of the functions can be used To use all of the functions without restrictions set Operation Mode to Expert see Operation Mode Setup on page 48 Certain listening modes or HOME MENU items cannot be selected FAQ ADAPTER PORT terminal ED Video signals are not output from the When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the component Symptom Remedy component terminal terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal the video signals may The B uetooth wireless technology Check that no object that emits electromagnetic waves in the 2 4 GHz band microwave e tothe monitor connected to hie component terminal I this ha
72. options on page 74 See Manual MCACC setup on page 92 Auto delay PQLS See Setting the Audio options on page 74 See Setting the POLS function on page 71 Height Gain Dolby Pro Logic llz Height option setting the Audio options on page 74 Phase Control See Setting the Audio options on page 74 See Better sound using Phase Control on page 61 Virtual Surround Back 1 Full Band Phase Control See Setting the Audio options on page 74 See Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control on page 61 Virtual Height Standing Wave See Setting the Audio options on page 74 See Setting the Audio options on page 74 Virtual Wide Setting the Audio options on page 74 Phase Control Plus See Setting the Audio options on page 74 See Setting the Audio options on page 74 Virtual Depth See Setting the Audio options on page 74 Auto Sound Retriever See Setting the Audio options on page 74 Digital Video Converter L ALC Auto Level Control See Setting the Video options on page 76 See Auto playback on page 58 Pure Cinema oee Setting the Video options on page 76 Front Stage Surround Advance See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 58 Progressive Motion i i setting the Video options on page 76 Sound Retriever Air See Setting the Video options on page 76 See Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 58 Advanced Video Adjust i Setting the Video options
73. or the speaker configuration displayed isn t correct there may be a problem with the speaker connection If selecting RETRY doesn t work turn off the power and check the speaker con nections If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply use to select the speaker and to change the setting and continue If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone listening position or when using speakers that affect the phase dipole speakers reflective speakers etc Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected If Reverse Phase is displayed the speaker s wiring and may be inverted Check the speaker connections fthe connections were wrong turn off the power disconnect the power cord then reconnect properly After this perform the Auto MCACC procedure again fthe connections were right select GO NEXT and continue 8 Make sure OK is selected then press ENTER A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings The Advanced MCACC menu Again try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening It may take 3 to 12 minutes e f you selected a STAND WAVE Multi Point setup in step 2 you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position 9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu r
74. page 101 Operation Mode Setup Use this to select this receiver s operation mode For details see Operation Mode Setup on page 48 Basic playback Playing a SOUTE ea ace 50 PIAV UNG NUP OG E E A m 51 PAY MEGA USB CC de 52 Playing an MHL compatible GeViCe ccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenneeesssnsnaeeeeeseseseeeensasnnesesssnsaneeenensees 53 Playing music etie 54 Listening to thE WACO RE TTE 54 Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of MUSIC eens 55 Basic playback Playing a source Here are the basic instructions for playing a source such as a DVD disc with your home theater system AUTO ALC RECEIVER DIRECT BDR E3 C3 302 USB CBL E Tues INPUT SELECT RECEIVER ES EE VOLUME T 1 Switch on your system components and receiver Start by switching on the playback component for example a DVD player your TV and subwoofer if you have one then the receiver press RECEIVER Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Select the input function you want to play You can use the input function buttons on the remote control INPUT SELECT or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial e f you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL page 60 3 Pre
75. press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time min 60 min of 90 min e You can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing SLEEP once Pressing repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options again e The sleep timer is valid for all zones If any zone is on the sleep timer continues functioning Dimming the display You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display Note that when selecting sources the display automatically brightens for a few seconds Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display e You can also choose to turn the display off In this case the FL OFF indicator lights Switching the HDMI output Set which terminal to use when outputting video and audio signals from the HDMI output terminals The HDMI OUT 1 terminal is compatible with the Control with HDMI function Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode then press HDMI OUT Please wait a while when Please wait is displayed The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed e The synchronized amp mode is canceled when the HDMI output is switched If you wish to use the synchro nized amp mode switch to HDMI OUT 1 then select the synchronized amp mode on the TV using the TV s remote control About the Speaker B Link function When 7 1ch Speaker B or 5
76. screen Also make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position The angle depends on the size of the room Use less of an angle for bigger rooms e Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm 2 ft to 3 ft higher than your ears and tilted slightly downward Make sure the speakers don t face each other For DVD Audio the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback Try not to place the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speak ers Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect Connecting the speakers Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive and negative terminal Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves This unit supports speakers with a nominal impedance of 4Q to 16 OQ A CAUTION e These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage To prevent the risk of electric shock when con necting or disconnecting the speaker cables disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts e Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure Bare wire connecti
77. select ON this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to determine the IP address e The IP address determined by the Auto IP function is 169 254 X X You cannot listen to an Internet radio sta tion if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function 3 Enter the IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server Press T to selecta number and to move the cursor 4 Select OFF or ON for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server In case you select OFF proceed with Step 7 In case you select ON on the other hand proceed with Step 5 5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name Use to select a character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection 6 Enter the port number of your proxy server Use to select a character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection 7 Select OK to confirm the IP Address Proxy setup Network Standby This setting allows the AVNavigator function for operating the receiver from a computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode 1 Select Network Standby from the Network Setup menu 2 Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF e ON The AVNavigator function can be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode e OFF Ihe AVNavigator function cannot be used when the
78. spaciousness and envelopment The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround chan nel s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel This expands the listening position and creates with only two speakers the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre THX Ultra2 Select2 Plus Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2 Select Plus certified it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 Select2 Plus logo which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come THX Ultra2 Select2 Plus requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation and hundreds of other param eters in both the digital and analog domain THX Surround EX THX Surround EX Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd In a movie theater film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program This channel called Surround Back places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left front
79. speaker s Connected Dolby Digital Surround OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS Surround Neo X CINEMA Neo X CINEMA DTS Surround Neo X CINEMA Other stereo sources Stereo playback Other stereo sources Stereo playback ANALOG DIRECT stereo Stereo playback Analog sources PCM sources DVD A sources SACD sources Surround Back speaker s Not connected As above As above Dolby Digital Surround OO Pro Logic II MOVIE Multichannel signal formats Input signal format Auto Surround ALC PURE DIRECT DIRECT Surround Back speaker s Connected Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE lt a gt lt a gt Dolby Digital EX 6 1 channel flagged Dolby TrueHD EX 6 1 channel flagged DTS HD Master Audio ES 6 1 channel flagged DTS ES Matrix DTS ES Matrix DTS ES 6 1 channel sources 6 1 channel flagged DTS ES Matrix Discrete ing DTS ES Matrix Discrete Straight decoding DTS sources 5 1 channel encoding Straight decoding DTS HD sources Other 5 1 6 1 7 1 channel sources Surround Back speaker s Not connected DVD A sources Multi ch PCM Straight decoding Straight decoding SACD sources 6 1 channel encoding Other 5 1 6 1 7 1 channel sources a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected As above As above Speaker Setting Guide In order to achieve an even better surround effect it is important to accurately position the speakers and make their volume
80. stations on the vTuner list can be registered In this case they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio Check the website below to listen to SiriusXM Internet Radio http www siriusxm com internetradio e You must have a registered account in order to listen to songs using SiriusXM Internet Radio Select SiriusXM then follow the instructions on the screen to make the account settings e f you want to check or change an account that has already been registered press the TOOLS button on the SiriusXM top page and display the account input screen then check or change the account e Some functions may be changed at SiriusXM s discretion 2 Note e When disposing of the product we recommend you reset it to delete the data See Resetting the system on page 81 Listening to Pandora Internet Radio Pandora is personalized internet radio that is designed to help you discover new music you ll love mixed in with music you already know For details check the website http www pandora com e You must have a registered account in order to listen to songs using Pandora Internet Radio Select PANDORA then follow the instructions on the screen to make the account settings e As of February 2012 the Pandora service is only offered in the United States e Some functions may be changed at Pandora s discretion A Note e When disposing of the product we recommend you r
81. the CLR button About network playback The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies Windows Media Player See Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Player 12 on page 123 for more on this Windows Media DRM Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management WMDRM is a platform to protect and securely deliver content for playback on computers portable devices and network devices This unit s functions as a WMDRM 10 for networked devices WMDRM protected content can only be played on media servers supporting WMDRM Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual property including copyrights This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content Revocation does not affect unprotected content When you download licenses for protected content you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content f you decline an upgrade you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft DLNA C CERTIFIED DLNA CERTIFIED Audio Player
82. the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC proce dure was performed it may not be possible to adjust properly In this case we recommend performing the procedure at Fine Speaker Distance on page 92 in the Manual MCACC measurements then performing the adjustment described here without moving the microphone The adjustment here is for adjusting for an error of 0 5 inch or less not adjustable with the Auto MCACC Setup 0 0 may be displayed after distance correction with the Auto MCACC Setup but even in this case this adjustment allows you to optimize the correction Note that if the Auto MCACC Setup is performed after com pleting the fine adjustment here the correction precision will drop to about 0 5 inch Like with the Auto MCACC Setup perform this adjustment in as quiet an environment as possible 0 0 will be displayed if abrupt noise is input during the adjustment The distance for all the channels can only be made uniform even if the R front right channel is adjusted in the proper order e De very careful not to tip the speakers over when moving them The result of the adjustment performed here can be checked by listening to the test pulses output at the Precision Distance the test pulses will be more centrally positioned between the speakers than before the adjustment was performed Be careful not to change the distance values at this time 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu The A
83. the MCACC Data Check menu repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Home Menu Speaker Setting Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers See Speaker Setting on page 99 for more on this 1 Select Speaker Setting from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 Select the channel you want to check Use to select the channel The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted Channel Level Use this to display the level of the various channels See Channel Level on page 99 for more on this 1 Select Channel Level from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When MCACC is highlighted use to select the MCACC preset you want to check The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed is displayed for channels that are not connected Speaker Distance Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position See Speaker Distance on page 99 for more on this 1 Select Speaker Distance from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When MCACC is highlighted use to select the MCACC preset you want to check The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed is displayed for chan nels that are not connected Standing Wave Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories See Standing Wave on page 9
84. the channel level for the current speaker The Advanced MCACC menu Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional procedure is effective when the lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room i e it sounds boomy as shown at Type A below or when different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics as shown at Type B Type A Reverberance of high vs low frequencies Low frequencies Level High frequencies Acoustic Cal EQ Pro calibration range Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range Time 0 80 160 in msec Type B Reverb characteristics for different channels Level Front L Front R Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range Time in msec Acoustic Cal EQ Pro calibration range 0 80 160 Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional 1 Select EQ Professional then press ENTER 2 Select an option and press ENTER e Reverb Measurement Use this to measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration e Reverb View You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel f the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on p
85. the operating instructions for more on audio connections Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration A Note e f your display only has one HDMI terminal you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component e Depending on the component audio output may be limited to the number of channels available from the connected display unit for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio limitations e f you want to switch the input function you ll have to switch functions on both the receiver and your display unit e Since the sound is muted on the display when using the HDMI connection you must adjust the volume on the display every time you switch input functions Cleaning the unit e Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt e When the surface is dirty wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water and wrung out well and then wipe again with a dry cloth Do not use furniture wax or cleansers e Never use thinners benzene insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit since these will cor rode the surface Additional information Glossary Audio formats Decoding Dolby The Dolby technologies are explained below See http www dolby com for more detailed information Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas and in the home
86. the receiver or TV 1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV See Connecting an MHL compatible device on page 41 2 Press MHL on the remote control to switch the receiver to the MHL 3 Select and play the desired contents on the MHL compatible device A Note e MHL compatible devices can be operated with the receiver s remote control by pressing the remote control s MHL button but depending on the MHL compatible device being used some buttons may not be operable Playing an MHL compatible device on a TV with the receiver s power off An MHL compatible device connected to the receiver can be played on a TV connected to the receiver with the receiver s power turned off he Standby Through setting at HDMI Setup on the receiver must be set to something other than OFF Basic playback Playing music from a PC SC 68 only Use this function to play digital audio input to the unit s rear panel USB DAC IN terminal amp Important e When switching this unit s input from USB DAC to another input first quit the computer s music playback application then switch the input e The exclusive driver must be installed on the computer in order to play high sound quality files of over 48 kHz 24 bits The driver software is provided on the included CD ROM AVNavigator 1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your PC see Using a USB cable to connect to a PC on page 42 2 Use INPUT SELECT to select U
87. to the SURROUND BACK L Single terminals ZONE 2 right ZONE 2 left Front right Front left Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 SURROUND surRounp Back EY L Single ee FRONTWIDE ed R e ue Q e Surround back right Surround right Connecting your equipment E 7 2 channel surround system Front height Front wide amp ZONE 2 F 5 2 channel surround system amp Front Bi amping connection High quality connection Multi Zone surround amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone e Select 7 1ch FH FW ZONE 2 from the Speaker System menu e Select 5 1ch Bi Amp ZONE 2 from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 98 to do this See Speaker system setting on page 98 to do this Bi amp compatible speaker Bi amp compatible speaker Front height right Front height left Front right Front left Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 LINE LEVEL INPUT R L R longo m sunRouup Back EY L Singe SURROUND sunRouNpBack EY o Surround right ZONE 2 right ZONE 2 right G 5 2 channel surround system amp ZONE 2 ZONE 3 connection Multi Zone e Select 5 1ch ZONE 2 3 from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 98 to do this ZONE 3 right ZONE 3 left Front right Front left Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 FRoNT WIDE ed surROUND Back EY R SURROUND ZONE 2 right Connec
88. wireless technology device may not be set to the communication mode thing other than 1080 24p page 76 supporting the Bluetooth wireless technology Check the setting of the Bluetooth wireless technology device Check that pairing is correct The pairing setting was deleted from this unit or the B ue tooth wireless technology device Reset the pairing Settings Check that the profile is correct Use a Bluetooth wireless technology device that supports Symptom Remedy A2DP profile and AVRCP profile The Auto MCACC Setup continually The ambient noise level may be too high Keep the noise level in the room as low as shows an error possible see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 46 If the noise level cannot be kept low enough you will have to set up the surround sound manually page 98 Video oe When using only one surround back speaker connect it to the SURROUND BACK L Symptom Remedy Single terminals No image is output when an inputis Check the video connections of the source component To use a 5 1 channel speaker set use the surround speakers for the surround channel selected For HDMI or when V CONV is set to OFF and a TV and another component are con not the surround back channel nected with different cords in Setting the Video options on page 76 you must connect Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and th
89. 0064 Bradford 0008 0104 Brillian 0109 Brockwood 0004 Broksonic 0104 Candle 0004 0006 0012 0100 Carnivale 0100 Carver 0101 CCE 0110 Celebrity 0002 Celera 0106 Changhong 0106 Citizen 0004 0006 0008 0100 Clarion 0104 Coby 0056 Colortyme 0004 0006 Concerto 0004 0006 Contec 0104 Contec Cony 0007 0008 Craig 0008 0104 Crosley 0081 0101 Crown 0008 0104 CTX 0063 Curtis Mathes 0000 0004 0006 0014 0100 0101 CXC 0008 0104 Cytron 0093 Daewoo 0004 0005 0006 0023 Daytron 0004 0006 Dell 0073 DiamondVision 0096 Dimensia 0000 Disney 0046 Dumont 0004 0011 0099 Durabrand 0041 0103 0104 Dwin 0014 Electroband 0002 Electrograph 0107 Electrohome 0002 0003 0004 0006 Element 0082 Emerson 0004 0006 0007 0008 0009 0023 0103 0104 Emprex 0092 Envision 0004 0006 0100 Epson 0061 ESA 0103 Fujitsu 0009 Funai 0008 0009 0103 0104 Futuretech 0008 0104 Gateway 0067 0107 0108 GE 0000 0003 0004 0006 0010 0016 0039 GFM 0080 0084 Gibralter 0004 0011 0099 0100 Goldstar 0004 0005 0006 0007 0100 Gradiente 0066 Grunpy 0008 0009 0104 Haier 0112 Hallmark 0004 0006 Harman Kardon 0101 Harvard 0008 0104 Havermy 0014 Hewlett Packard 0053 Hisense 0069 Hitachi 0004 0006 0007 Hyundai 0098 Ilo 0089 0091 IMA 0008 Infinity 0101 InFocus 0074 Initial 0091 Insignia 0085 0086 Inteq 0099 Janeil 0012 JBL 0101 JC Penney 0000 0004 0005 0006
90. 011 0099 0100 Sampo 0004 0006 0100 0107 Samsung 0004 0005 0006 0007 0022 0032 0076 0071 0083 0100 0110 Sansui 0025 Sanyo 0004 0050 Sceptre 00 2 Scotch 0006 Scott 0004 0006 0007 0008 0009 0090 0104 Sears 0000 0004 0006 0009 0101 0102 0103 Sharp 0004 0006 0007 0014 0033 Sheng Chia 0014 Shogun 0004 Signature 0001 Sony 0002 0018 0029 0030 0031 0034 Soundesign 0004 0006 0008 0009 0104 Squareview 0103 SSS 0004 0008 0104 Starlite 0008 0104 Superscan 0014 Supre Macy 0012 Supreme 0002 SVA 0088 Sylvania 0004 0006 0049 0079 0080 0100 0101 0103 Symphonic 0008 0041 0103 0104 Syntax 0054 Syntax Brillian 0054 Tandy 0014 Tatung 0003 0108 Technics 0010 0105 Techwood 0004 0006 0010 Teknika 0001 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0101 0104 TMK 0004 0006 TNCi 0099 Toshiba 0026 0028 0036 0038 0040 0043 0102 Vector Research 0100 Vidikron 0101 Vidtech 0004 0005 0006 Viewsonic 0058 0107 Viking 0012 Viore 0089 Vizio 0004 0070 0071 0108 Wards 0000 0001 0004 0005 0006 0009 0100 0101 Waycon 0102 Westinghouse 0047 0051 White Westinghouse 0023 Yamaha 0004 0005 0006 0100 Zenith 0001 0004 0011 0015 0099 DVD If operations are not possible using the preset codes below you may be able to conduct operations with the preset codes for the BD DVR BDR HDR Pioneer 2014 2197 2256 Accurian 2092 Daewoo 2021 2087 Denon
91. 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1 this receiver even if it is HDCP compatible In this case connect using the component Then turn on first the TV s power then this receiver s power or composite video jacks between Sourceandreceiver When ZONE 4 is setto ON thevideo This is due to the HDMI connection specifications it is not a malfunction When playing If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your resolution and number of audio the same input in the main zone and ZONE 4 video and audio signals that can be output monitor please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer channels for the main zone side in common for all the devices connected to the HDMI OUT 1 HDMI OUT 2 and HDMI for support changes ZONE 4 OUT terminals are set If video images do not appear on your TV try adjusting the resolution Deep Color or other setting for your component While analog video signals are being output over HDMI use a separate connection for audio output AVNavigator To output signals in Deep Color use an HDMI cable High Speed HDMI Cable to Symptom Causes Remedy connect this receiver to a component or TV with the Deep Color feature Z AVNavigator cannot be An error message may appear Re start the PC then start install with no other applications No picture Try changing the Resolution setting in Setting the Video options on page 76 installed
92. 1ch SP B Bi Amp you can select from e SP A ON Sound is output from the A speaker terminals maximum 5 channels e SP BON Sound is output from the two speakers connected to the B speaker terminals Multichannel sources will not be heard e SP A B ON Sound is output from the A speaker terminals up to 5 channels depending on the source the two speakers connected to the B speaker terminals and the subwoofer The sound from the B speaker termi nals will be the same as the sound from the A speaker terminals multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels e SP OFF No sound is output from the speakers A Note e When 7 1ch Speaker B or 5 1ch SP B Bi Amp is selected for the Speaker System setting page 98 and the Speaker B Link setting HDMI Setup on page 70 is turned on the setting of the played speaker terminals switches automatically when HDMI OUT is switched For details see Switching the HDMI output on page 80 e The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 98 However if SP B ON is selected above no sound is heard from the subwoofer the LFE channel is not downmixed e All speaker systems except 7 1ch Speaker B connections are switched off when headphones are connected Using the MULTI ZONE controls The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources See MULTI ZONE remote controls on page 79 1 Press
93. 2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 2 inch Increments 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu A Note e For best surround sound make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position X Curve Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms The X Curve setting acts as a kind of re equalization for home theater listening and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks Since the principal is the same X Curve isn t applied when you re using any of the Home THX Pure direct or Optimum surround modes 1 Select X Curve from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Choose the X Curve setting you want Use to adjust the setting The X Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave starting at 2 kHz The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases to a maximum of 3 0dB oct Use the following guidelines to set the X Curve according to your room size iem m pe Tn T e X Curve dB oct DS T5 LS e2 0 25 e f you select OFF the frequency curve will be flat and the X Curve has no effect 3 When you re finished press RETURN THX Audio Setting This menu allows the user to adjust various THX features including Loudness Plus SBch processing THX Ultra2 Select2 Subwoofer on off and Boundary Gain Control Please see page 116 f
94. 3 for more on this 1 Select Standing Wave from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When Filter Channel is highlighted use f amp to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed 3 Press to highlight MCACC then use f 4 to select the MCACC preset you want to check Acoustic Cal EQ Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different MCACC presets See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 98 for more on this 1 Select Acoustic Cal EQ from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When Ch is highlighted use 4 to select the channel The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed 3 Press to highlight MCACC then use f 4 to select the MCACC preset you want to check Group Delay Use this to display the calibrated speaker group delay results See Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control on page 61 for more on this 1 Select Group Delay from the MCACC Data Check menu 2 When Channel is highlighted use to select the channel you want to check The result of group delay calibration for the selected channel is displayed When measurements have been performed with Full Au
95. 6113 6114 6115 6116 Toshiba 6038 6054 6039 TPS 6041 Triasat 6033 Ultrasat 6021 US Digital 6020 USDTV 6020 ViewSat 6048 Voom 6032 Zehnder 6101 Zenith 6042 6069 6037 Star Choice 6032 Tivo 6113 6114 6115 6116 Macab 6040 Mediacom 6074 6029 Memorex 6112 Motorola 6074 6073 6072 6029 6122 6094 MTS 6094 Myrio 6077 6078 Noos 6040 Pace 6074 6029 6028 Regal 6072 6106 6083 Rogers 6029 Panasonic 6112 6083 Runco 6112 Paragon 6112 Samsung 6095 Penney 6112 Scientific Atlanta 6029 Philips 6012 6028 6027 6112 Pulsar 6112 Sejin 6077 Quasar 6112 Shaw 6074 Additional information Starcom 6122 Stargate 6122 Suddenlink 6074 6029 Supercable 6072 United Cable 6072 6122 US Electronics 6072 Videoway 6112 Zenith 6112 Time Warner 6074 6029 6058 Tivo 6076 Toshiba 6112 Cable Set Top Box Cable PVR Combination Pioneer 6029 6325 6328 Comcast 6074 6029 6083 6329 6076 Amino 6078 Cox 6074 6029 Bright House 6074 6029 Digeo 6081 6058 Cable One 6074 6029 Homecast 6024 Cablevision 6074 6029 Insight 6074 6029 Charter 6074 6029 6058 Knology 6029 Cisco 6029 6083 Mediacom 6074 6029 CD R Pioneer 5001 5053 5071 Philips 5054 Yamaha 5055 Tuner Pioneer 5060 Laser Disc Player Pioneer 5002 5003 Cassete Deck Pioneer 5058 5059 Digital Tape Pioneer 5057 MD Pioneer 5056 Network Audio Player Pioneer 5063 Game X Box 2313 AV Receiver Pioneer 50
96. 70 Connecting your equipment Plugging in the receiver Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver including the speakers A CAUTION e Handle the power cord by the plug part Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock Do not place the unit a piece of furniture or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock Check the power cord once in a while If you find it damaged ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement e Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this unit e Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than that described below e The receiver should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use e g when on vacation e Make sure the blue STANDBY ON light has gone out before unplugging oh Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver NJ Plug the other end into a power outlet e After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins You cannot car
97. 96 ID 1 5097 ID 2 5098 ID 3 5099 ID 4 Motorola 6074 6081 Supercable 6072 Myrio 6078 Time Warner 6074 6029 Pace 6029 6058 Panasonic 6083 Tivo 6076 Rogers 6029 Scientific Atlanta 6029 Shaw 6074 Suddenlink 6074 6029 To register your product find the nearest authorized service location to purchase replacement parts operating instructions or accessories please go to one of following URLs Pour enregistrer votre produit trouver le service apr s vente agr le plus proche et pour acheter des pi ces de rechange des modes d emploi ou des accessoires reportez vous aux URL suivantes In the USA Aux Etats Unis http www pioneerelectronics com In Canada Aux Canada http www pioneerelectronics ca S018 B1 EnFr PIONEER CORPORATION 1 1 Shin ogura Saiwai ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 212 0031 Japan Register Your Product on PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC http www pioneerelectronics com US P O BOX 1540 Long Beach California 90801 1540 U S A TEL 800 421 1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC 340 Ferrier Street Unit 2 Markham Ontario L3R 2Z5 Canada TEL 1 877 283 5901 905 479 4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087 Keetberglaan 1 B 9120 Melsele Belgium TEL 03 570 05 1 1 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE LTD 253 Alexandra Road 04 01 Singapore 159936 TEL 65 6472 7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 5 Arco Lane Heatherton Victoria 3202 Australia TEL 03 9586 6300
98. AV SELECTION SCREEN SIZE AUDIO AUDIO DISPLAY DISPLAY AUDIO OUTPUT RESOLUTION CH ie a Controls for BD Controlling the rest of your system Audio Video components Button s LD CD CD R SACD MD DAT TAPE SOURCE POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF POWER ON OFF Number buttons numerics numerics numerics e ENTER CLASS ENTER DISC ENTER ee ENTER lt b gt tye titers Se eee eee SACD SETUP lt b gt RETURN E wwo ii a mM lt b gt psp o aia ae a Booo oOo lt b gt a Controls for MD b Controls for SACD Controlling the rest of your system TV Projector Button s TV Projector SOURCE POWER ON gus E gus S g SHARE mM I M MN p pog S ENTER CLASS t Ve t j e st HIDE MENU HDMIT Sr eid OSS b PW SCS pe AREE 00 The Advanced MCACC menu Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu eerceeeeeeenns 90 Automatic MCACC EXDO6Trt iios rara n oe nER uk Ru cinE n EEA EE FERE M TREREUE RUE KE URS iania RUKPRF SVNF NUM NR NPEREKE 90 Manga MCACC SGEUD eaten nn E Eram Lap an iinii HMM I E 92 acia duemue teeip pe 95 Data Managern Mt M 96 The Advanced MCACC menu Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu The Advanced MCACC Multi Channel ACoustic Calibration system was developed in Pioneer s laboratories with t
99. About network playback cositas MEO eT re 66 About playable file formats c soecoriisessausu uz cescv um ekvhuu aus adu cuc Uv EE CDAY RE aaa Eaa a 68 Playback with NETWORK features Introduction This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your components to these terminals Listening to Internet radio stations You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created edited and managed by the vl uner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products See Playback with Network functions on page 65 and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 65 Playback the music files stored in PCs You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs using this unit e Besides a PC you can also play back audio files stored on your other components with the built in media server function based on DLNA 1 0 or DLNA 1 5 framework and protocols i e network capable hard disks and audio systems See Playback with Network functions on page 65 and Playing back audio tiles stored on components on the network on page 66 Listening to SiriusXM or Pandora See Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio on page 66 See Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page 66 A Note e To listen to Internet radio stations you must sign a contract with an ISP Internet Service Provider beforehand e Photo or video fi
100. Band Phase Control Activating Full Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it also involves the effects of Phase Control The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers connected Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency bands output from a speaker system consisting of multiple speakers in case of typical 3 way speakers for instance the tweeter the squawker midrange and the woofer output sound in the high middle and low frequency ranges respectively Though these speakers are designed to flatten the frequency amplitude charac teristics across wide ranges there are cases where the group delay characteristics are not effectively flattened This phase distortion of the speakers subsequently causes group delay the delay of low frequency sound against high frequency sound during audio signal playback This receiver analyzes the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers by measuring test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone therefore flattening the analyzed frequency phase characteristics during audio signal playback the same correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers This correction minimizes group delay between the ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency phase characteristics across all ranges Furthermore the enhanced frequency phase characteristics between cha
101. Bi Amp Bi amping connection of the front and surround speakers for high sound quality with 5 2 channel surround sound Front Bi Amp Surround Bi Amp Connecting your equipment J 5 2 channel surround system amp Front and Center Bi amping connection High quality surround Speaker System setting 5 1ch F C Bi Amp Bi amping connection of the front and center speakers for high sound quality with 5 2 channel surround sound Front Bi Amp Other speaker connections e Your favorite speaker connections can be selected even if you have fewer than 5 2 speakers except front left right speakers e When not connecting a subwoofer connect speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front channel The subwoofer s low frequency component is played from the front speakers so the speakers could be damaged e After connecting be sure to conduct the Full Auto MCACC speaker environment setting procedure See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 Connecting your equipment Placing the speakers Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect FHL Pp c _ FHR i e Place the surround speakers at 120 from the center If you 1 use the surround back speaker and 2 don t use the front height speakers front wide speakers we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside you e f you intend to connect only one surro
102. CC preset memory has been ug Mod 6 DFILTER Switches the AUDIO DAC Digital Audio Converter digital filter type SLOW Hi Sampling preset renamed ea Wen qametedisolaved oe wind One of three settings can be selected SLOW soft and warm SHARP SHARP g piay M1 MEMORY 1 Digital Filter solid and tight and SHORT quick and forward SHORT ON PQ Switches on off the effects of EQ Pro CH1 Channel 1 is Acoustic Calibration EQ OFF heard only ON RUE Suitehasonott hesite Standing Wave Control D AL Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should CH2 Channel 2 is Standing Wave OFF Dual Mono be played Dual mono is not widely used but is sometimes necessary heard only For discs created with standards other than Phase Control the LFE when two languages need to be sent to separate channels CH1 CH2 Both chan channel is delayed upon recording in the first place This function nels heard from front PHASE C corrects for phase shifting on such discs AUTO 0 to 16 ms gt speakers Phase Control Plus Hn bd is eb Md music Default AUTO This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF recognizes OFF en is selected the channel s delay is measured auto l the PCM signal on a CD for instance matically and the disc is played with the optimum correction Fixed PCM WRERON is sslected mokemo be eutput d rimigplavbaeket nor ON Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video so the lt
103. D AT THE USER S OWN RISK WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND PIONEER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED IN CONNECTION WITH ACCESS TO AND USE OF CONTENT SERVICES THROUGH THIS DEVICE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT PIONEER DOES NOT GUARANTEE REPRESENT OR WARRANT THAT CONTENT SERVICES WILL BE FREE FROM ERRORS INTERRUPTION LOSS CORRUPTION ATTACK VIRUSES INTERFERENCE HACKING OR OTHER SECURITY INTRUSION AND PIONEER DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE FOREGOING PIONEER IS NOT LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING FROM ACCESS TO OR USE OF CONTENT NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY PIONEER OR ITS CUSTOMER SERVICES REPRESENTATIVES WILL CREATE ANY SUCH WARRANTY INNO EVENT WILL PIONEER ITS AFFILIATES OR THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS DIRECTORS OR EMPLOYEES BE LIABLE IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OF THIRD PARTY CONTENT SERVICES THROUGH THIS DEVICE FOR PERSONAL INJURY OR SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR ATTORNEY S FEES LOST DATA OR LOST PROFITS REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT WILL PIONEER S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIRD PARTY CONTENT SERVICES OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY LAW IN CASES INVOLVING
104. D recorder and other video sources 33 Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other set top box 34 Connecting other audio components eeeeeeeeeeeee esee eee eene enne nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nn nnn 35 Connecting additional ampliTIeis uouro ricco rece eacus ede sire tenu sip ec cun e rue e dca ees cns cusa EkE s pee EU ence uEEEUEs 35 Connecting the multichannel analog inputs 1 e eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene enne nnn 36 Connecting AM FM RN CCIN NAS b 36 MULTIZONE Se D as sense tects 37 Connecting to the network through LAN interface sess sees 40 Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER eeeeeeee esee n nennen nennen nnne nnn nnn nnn nnn 40 eria a IPO etc 40 Connecting USB deVIEB sssrini inn insita dub a a EAE Eee araka E DRE UG 41 Connecting an MHL compatible device LLL esses esee eere eere 41 Connecting an HDMI equipped component to the front panel input 41 Using a USB cable to connect to a PC lleeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen ene nenne nennen nnn nnn nnn nenne nns 42 Connecting to a wireless LAN eio aii caressa wench ace cece de esac es
105. ER FAVORITES iPod USB or ADAPTER PORT inputs is selected in the main zone it is only possible to select the same input as in the main zone for the sub zone Inputs other than the ones listed here can be selected The same limitations apply when one of the above inputs is selected for the sub zone e tis not possible to select inputs for which HDMI IN 6 or IN 7 is assigned for ZONE 4 e ZONE 4 cannot be operated when using the CU RF100 omni directional remote control separately sold e SC 68 only It is not possible to select one of the INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM PANDORA MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES iPod USB or ADAPTER PORT inputs and the USB DAC input simultaneously in Zones 2 and 3 Basic MULTI ZONE setup ZONE 2 1 Connecta separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration 2 Connect a subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver When a subwoofer is connected we recommend setting HPF High Pass Filter at ZONE Setup to ON page 103 3 Connecta TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver e COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be used to output clear images he GUI screen is not displayed if only the COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected Connecting your equipment 3 Maiore To use the surround back speaker terminals for ZONE 2 Sub zone ZONE 2 Main zone
106. ETURN Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen 18 PHONES jack Use to connect headphones When the headphones are connected there is no sound output from the speakers 19 MCACC SETUP MIC jack Use to connect the supplied microphone page 45 20 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals Use to connect your Apple iPod iPhone iPad as an audio and video source page 40 or connect a USB device for audio and photo playback page 41 Controls and displays 21 HDMI input MHL connector Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device Video camera etc page 41 An MHL compatible mobile device can also be connected here using the included MHL cable page 41 Connecting your equipment Connectng your eguip MeN asrasa nEaN a aE NRE EAE A ANR 18 Rear pane MC 18 Determining the speakers application cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseseseseeess 19 PACING tle SDBSKGBES seran E E E EEEE 22 Connecting the SOCAN Oona ascent ee 22 Installing your speaker SySLOeTIi icucaas sinn ma iuueni Lea age ca Lege Rua inu Ran ced LUE doewsnesssnesiaeaawenabiuententechaes 24 About the audio connection TETTE TTE 29 About the video COHVSFIBI iier HERPES eR eM DE 29 ied 30 Connecting your TV and playback components sess 30 Connecting an HDD DVD recorder B
107. ETURN You will return to the Home Menu About the Home Menu This receiver s Home Menu HOME MENU can be used to make various settings and to check and adjust items that have been set To display the Home Menu screen press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU HOME MENU AN RECEIVER 2 MCACC Data Check 3 Data Management 4 System Setup 5 Network Information 6 Operation Mode Setup advanced Return gt A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu The top level in the Home Menu is as shown below Refer to the respective explanations to set check and adjust as necessary e Advanced MCACC Use this to make automatic settings and detailed manual settings for the surround sound For details see Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 90 e MCACC Data Check Use this to check the MCACC memory For details see Checking MCACC Data on page e e Data Management Use this to manage the data in the MCACC memory For details see Data Management on page 96 e System Setup Use this to make various settings related to this system For details see Making receiver set tings from the System Setup menu on page 98 e Network Information The setting status of the network related items can be checked For detail see Checking the Network Information on
108. First set the IP address on the receiver then set the same address in AN Navigator page 100 After this press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver Check the computer s network settings security settings etc After this press Detection in AVNavigator to redetect the receiver Either refresh the page s display using the browser s refresh button or display a different page from the links so that the setting is transferred This is not a problem Perform the operation to authorize the blocked contents Download Adobe Flash Player from the Adobe site http www adobe com downloads If your version is old update it Contact your contracted provider Remedies Store the folders files in the FAT region Limit the maximum number of levels in a folder to 9 page 52 Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB memory device cannot be played back page 52 Symptoms Causes A USB memory device is not recognized The USB memory device does not support the mass storage class specifications A USB hub is currently being used This receiver recognizes the USB memory device as a fraud A USB memory device is connected and displayed but the audio files stored on the USB memory device cannot be played back Some formats of USB memory devices including FAT 12 NTFS and HFS cannot be played back on this receiver The file format cannot be properly played back on this receiver FAQ Remedi
109. Front Bi Amp or 7 1ch ZONE 2 in Step 2 select the placement of the surround speakers In a 7 1 channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position the surround sound of 5 1 channel sources is heard from the side This function mixes the sound of the surround speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it should be Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results In this case set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR e ON SIDE Select when the surround speakers is positioned right beside you e IN REAR Select when the surround speaker is positioned obliquely behind you 4 When Setting Change is displayed select Yes If No is selected the setting is not changed You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Speaker Setting Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration size number of speakers and crossover frequency It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 are correct Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets and cannot be set independently e f you re using a THX speaker setup set all speakers to SMALL 1 Select Speaker Setting from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set then
110. HDMI DVI compatible order to listen to the sound of Other HDMI DVI the TV over the receiver equipped component Blu ray Disc player HDMI DVI compatible monitor Select one DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL AUDIO OUT R ANALOG L COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE IN DVD The terms HDMI and HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries x v Color and x v Color are trademarks of Sony Corporation e f you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver connect the receiver and TV with audio cables When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections if the TV supports the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal so there is no need to connect an audio cable In this case set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON see HDMI Setup on page 70 f you use a coaxial digital audio cable or RCA analog audio cable you ll need to tell the receiver which digi tal or analog audio input you connected the TV to see Ihe Input Setup menu on page 47 Connecting your equipment Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output This diagram shows connections of a TV with HDMI input and DVD player or other playback component with no HDMI output to the receiver HDMI DVI
111. IE of Cancel 3 1a Full Auto MCACC AN RECEIVER YES tei y Now Analyzing 2 10 Environment Check Ambient Noise Microphone Speaker YES NO Cancel GJ The configuration shown on screen should reflect the actual speakers you have e f you see an ERR message or the speaker configuration displayed isn t correct there may be a problem with the speaker connection If selecting RETRY doesn t work turn off the power and check the speaker con nections If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply use to select the speaker and to change the setting and continue e fthe speaker is not pointed to the microphone listening position or when using speakers that affect the phase dipole speakers reflective speakers etc Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected If Reverse Phase is displayed the speaker s wiring and may be inverted Check the speaker connections fthe connections were wrong turn off the power disconnect the power cord then reconnect properly After this perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again Ifthe connections were right select GO NEXT and continue 7 Make sure OK is selected then press ENTER A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings Again try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening It may take 3 to 12 minutes 8 The Full
112. INB DVRIBDR M ss ess eae e f your turntable has line level outputs i e it has a built in phono pre amp connect it to the ANALOG IN 1 CD inputs instead e You can t hear HDMI audio through this receiver s digital out jack Connecting additional amplifiers This receiver has more than enough power for any home use but it s possible to add additional amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre outs Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers ANALOG NPUT Front channel amplifier LI O Center channel amplifier mono Surround channel amplifier ANALOG INPUT Sr Front height SUBWOOFE 2 SURROUND 3URR BAC m Ree Si ZA IAS channel amplifier G ANALOG D E an ff E mo Front wide channel amplifier Surround back channel amplifier Powered subwoofer 2 Powered subwoofer 1 If you re not using a subwoofer change the front speaker setting see Speaker Setting on page 95 to LARGE e You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre outs for a single speaker as well In this case plug the amplifier into the left SURROUND BACK L Single terminal only The sound from the surround back terminals will depen
113. M RECORD THESE NUMBERS ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND KEEP IN A SAFE PLACE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE D36 AP9 1_A1_En CAUTION This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions use shielded cables and connectors for connections D8 10 3a_A1_En This product is for general household purposes Any failure due to use for other than household purposes such as long term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period K041 A1 En This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 D8 10 1 3 A1 En SC 68 only CAUTION HOT SURFACE DO NOT TOUCH The top surface over the internal heatsink may become hot when operating this product continuously The Safety of Your Ears is in Your Hands Get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level a level that lets the sound come through clearly without annoying blaring or distortion and most importantly without affecting your sensitive hearing Sound can be deceiving Over time your hearing comfort level adapts to higher volumes of sound so what sounds normal can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE
114. Memory Copy from the Data Management setup menu 2 Select the setting you want to copy All Data Copies all the settings of the selected MCACC preset memory Level amp Distance Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC pre set memory 3 Select the MCACC preset you ll be copying the settings From then specify where you want to copy them To Make sure you don t overwrite an MCACC preset you re currently using this can t be undone 4 Select OK to confirm and copy the settings When MCACC Memory Copy is displayed select YES If NO is selected the memory is not copied Completed shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu Clearing MCACC presets If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset 1 Select MCACC Memory Clear from the Data Management setup menu 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear Make sure you don t clear an MCACC preset you re currently using this can t be undone 3 Select OK to confirm and clear the preset When MCACC Memory Clear is displayed select YES If NO is selected the memory is not cleared Completed shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu The System
115. NE 2 or ZONE 3 then press ENTER 3 Select the Volume Level setting you want When making multi zone connections using the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT or AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT terminals and per forming playback in Zone 2 or Zone3 you can set whether to adjust the Zone 2 or Zone3 volume on the receiver or to fix it to a specific volume 40 dB Fixed or 0 dB Fixed This is set to Variable upon shipment from the factory allowing the volume to be adjusted on the receiver If you would like to adjust the volume from the connected amplifier make the setting below For ZONE 2 this setting is not possible if multi zone settings have been made using the speaker terminals and Speaker System is set to 7 1ch ZONE 2 In this case adjust the volume for the sub zones on the receiver e Variable default The Zone 2 Zone3 volume is adjusted from the receiver e 40 dB Fixed 0 dB Fixed The Zone 2 Zone 3 volume level output from the receiver is fixed to the value set here 4 Select the Power ON Level setting you want The sub zone volume is set to the volume selected here when the sub zone is turned on using the multi zone func tion Zones 2 and 3 can be set separately When Volume Level is set to 40 dB Fixed or 0 dB Fixed the volume is fixed to that level so the volume cannot be set here e LAST default When MULTI ZONE is turned on the volume is set to the level set the last time you were listening to that zone e When MULTI ZONE is turn
116. ORY 1 If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you re listening to and where you re sitting for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TV 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode 2 While listening to a source press MCACC Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets See Data Management on page 96 to check and man age your current settings hese settings have no effect when headphones are connected e You can also press to select the MCACC preset Choosing the input signal On this receiver it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below e his receiver can only play back Dolby Digital PCM 32 kHz to 192 kHz and DTS including DTS 96 24 digital signal formats The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are Dolby Digital DTS PCM 32 kHz to 192 kHz Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus DIS EXPRESS DTS HD Master Audio and SACD e You may get digital noise when an LD CD DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal To prevent noise make the proper digital connections page 29 and set the signal input to DIGITAL Some DVD players don t output DTS signals For more details refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode 2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the
117. OTAL 150 mA HA e llustration shows the SC 68 however connections for the SC 67 are the same except where noted Rear panel e The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver s different input terminals Refer to he Input SC 68 Setup menu on page 47 to change the assignments if other connections are used Input Terminals LANGonoo DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS he MEM aerate za In p ut function C t El omponen ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE PB R B i ea vo sates ii IN BD BD amp DVD IN 1 COAX 1 IN 1 IN mico FRONT 1 SUBWOOFER P SURROUND SURRBACK FHEIGHT FWIDE FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURRBACK OUT IN IN IN j OUT IN IN INM CD FRONT G pem SUNT SURROUND SURRE ro eee 2 e 99 SAT CBL IN 2 COAX 2 DVR BDR IN 3 OPT 2 IN 2 VIDEO IN 4 IN3 FRONT CENTER FRONT HEIGHT FRONT WIDE El SURROUND SURROUND BACK n i R L R L 2 HMM AMLOOP my FM UNBAL 75 Q EN d IN 5 front panel OUTPUT 12V HDMI 7 IN 7 OUTPUT5V EXTENSION 150 mAMAX TOTAL 150 mA MAX IV OPT 1 CD ANALOG 1 e he CU RF100 omni directional remote control separately sold can be connected to the RS 232C and EXTENSION terminals Using the CU RF100 lets you display the receiver s display information on the remote control display in your hands and operate it without worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control is pointing 99 9 R
118. ROM included for the wireless LAN converter Check the settings of the wireless LAN router etc then change the settings of the wireless LAN converter Note however that making the advanced wireless LAN settings will not necessarily improve the wireless LAN environment Be careful when changing the settings The access point is set to conceal the SSID e nthis case the SSID may not be displayed on the access point list screen If not set the SSID etc by making the wireless LAN converter settings on the receiver manually The access point s security settings use WEP 152 bit length code key or shared key authentication e The receiver does not support WEP 152 bit length code key or shared key authentication Network connections cannot be established even when the above measures are taken e Reset the wireless LAN converter After this redo the wireless LAN converter s settings About resetting 1 Check that the wireless LAN converter s power is on 2 Press the wireless LAN converter s reset button for at least 3 seconds 3 Release the reset button When the wireless LAN converter is restarted the resetting procedure is completed FAQ Additional information Surround sound TOU NIN ANG m a 116 hiogeccm 116 ADOL IPO 2ciotisinci nere ee EM 117 ADOT SAIS oie EESTI E E E EE 117 PTS UME FPG wooo
119. S OUTPUT 5V EXTENSION 150 mA MAX Connecting your equipment This unit is equipped with speaker terminals for 11 channels allowing users to select a variety of speaker layouts e Speaker System setting 7 1ch Speaker B usage patterns according to their tastes The terminals to which the speakers should be connected differ accord ing to the speaker layout usage pattern Select one speaker layout usage pattern before connecting the speakers For instructions on connections see Installing your speaker system on page 24 e De sure to connect speakers to the front left and right channels L and R e tis also possible to only connect one of the surround back speakers SB or neither e f you have two subwoofers the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction In this case the same sound is output from the two subwoofers amp Important e The Speaker System setting must be made if you use any of the connections shown below other than A see Speaker system setting on page 98 he speakers from which sound is output can be switched according to the speaker layout usage pattern Speaker B sound is not necessarily output from all connected speakers Use the SPEAKERS button to switch the speak With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 7 2 channel surround sound in the main zone with
120. SB DAC You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel 3 Begin playback on the PC A Note e When using a USB cable to connect this unit to a PC for playing music files the following linear PCM digital signals are supported Quantization bitrate 16 bit 24 bit 32 bit Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 192 kHz e Output from the OPTICAL OUT terminal is not supported during USB DAC IN input e Playback cannot be controlled from this unit during use of this function use your computer to control playback e When disconnecting the USB cable always stop playback on the computer first e Sound may not be produced if your computer does not support USB 2 0 HS This unit does not support use of a USB hub Always use a USB cable to connect the unit directly to the computer Listening to the radio The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic search and manual step tuning functions If you already know the frequency of the station you want see Tuning directly to a station below Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later see Saving station presets on page 54 for more on how to do this 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner 2 Use BAND to change the band FM or AM if necessary 3 Tune to a station There are three ways to do this e Automatic tuning To search for stations in the currently selected band press
121. Setup and Other Setup menus Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu eren nnn Manual sp aker SQUID TREE Network Setup NN ica is cas enee Checking the Network Information ccccceeeessseeeeseeeeeseeesaeeeseeeeneesseeeseseeeaesesaeeeseenenneeeas The Other Setup miBhll ecto cece ate ees iioii rect ini a uM NIE D MAHL OMI t The System Setup and Other Setup menus Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu The following section describes how to change the speaker related settings manually and make various other settings input selection OSD language selection etc 1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu 3 Select System Setup from the Home Menu then press ENTER 4 Select the setting you want to adjust Manual SP Setup Sets the type of connection used for surround back terminals and the size number dis tance and overall balance of the connected speakers s
122. Setup is set to 40 dB Fixed or O dB Fixed e The VOLUME and MUTE buttons cannot be operated for ZONE 4 Making an audio or a video recording You can make an audio or a video recording from the built in tuner or from an audio or video source connected to the receiver such as a CD player or TV Keep in mind you can t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice versa so make sure the compo nents you are recording to from are hooked up in the same way see Connecting your equipment on page 18 for more on connections e The receiver s volume Audio parameters the tone controls for example and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal e Some digital sources are copy protected and can only be recorded in analog e Some video sources are copy protected These cannot be recorded Since the video converter is not available when making recordings from the video OUT jacks make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source the one you want to record to this receiver For example you must connect your recorder using Component video if your source has also been connected using Component video 1 Select the source you want to record Use the input function buttons or INPUT SELECT 2 Prepare the source you want to record Tune to the radio station load the CD video DVD etc 3 Select the input signal according to the signal to be recor
123. Surround back amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone Speaker System setting 7 1ch ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 7 2 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2 The selection of input devices is limited This speaker layout usage pattern provides 7 2 channel playback using the surround back channels in the main zone To achieve 7 2 channel playback using the front height and front wide channels with ZONE 2 connections see E Main zone ZONE 2 Sub zone E 7 2 channel surround system Front height Front wide amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone Speaker System setting 7 1ch FH FW ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 7 2 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2 The selection of input devices is limited This speaker layout usage pattern provides 7 2 channel playback using the front height and front wide channels in the main zone To achieve 7 2 channel playback using the surround back channels with ZONE 2 connections see D It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height speakers and the front wide speakers The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the SPEAKERS button For details see Switching the speaker terminals on page 78 Main zone ZONE2 Sub zone Connecting your equipment F 5 2 channel surround sy
124. The component connected to the network is not properly set There are no playable audio files on the component connected to the network Remedies Symptoms Switch on the built in DHCP server function of your router or set up the network manually according to your network environment page 100 Audio playback is undesir ably stopped or disturbed The automatic configuration process takes time Please wait Install Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 on your PC page 64 Audio files recorded in MPEG 4 AAC or FLAC cannot be played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 Try using another server Refer to the operation manual supplied with your server Check whether the component is affected by special cir cumstances or is in the sleep mode Try rebooting the component if necessary Try changing the settings for the component connected to the network Check the folder stored on the component connected to the network Check the computer s network settings security settings etc Cannot access Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 For more information check with the manufacturer of your server If the client is automatically authorized you need to enter the corresponding information again Check whether the connection status is set to Do not authorize Check the audio files stored on the component connected to the network Cannot listen to Internet
125. The video input can be selected from the following DVD SAT CBL DVR BDR VIDEO OFF 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu Maintenance Mode Only use this if so instructed by a Pioneer service engineer or custom installer MHL Setup Select whether or not to switch the input automatically to the MHL input when an MHL compatible device is connected e Default setting ON 1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu e Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu 2 Select System Setup from the Home Menu then press ENTER 3 Select MHL Setup from the System Setup menu 4 Select the Auto input switching setting you want e Note hisisonly valid tor MHL compatible devices supporting this function FAQ TrouDleshooting hee ee rT 106 d eM 106 I SMI Caren T 106 Otheraudio e d0 0 TEL REO E ETE 107 ADAPTER PORT terminal eeeeeeeeeeee neue eese eene enhn nn nunh nnn u nu us sese aa RR RR 444a Ra sas assa asas a rs saris 108 pro 108 SN
126. USB memory audio and INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM PANDORA MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES digital audio input only to achieve high sound quality e With the iPod USB INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM PANDORA MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES or ADAPTER PORT input func tion by default S RTRV is set to ON e When ON is selected optimum correction of the audio signals input via the HDMI OUT terminal is conducted with the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function and the sound of digital TV broadcasts is produced with HD quality This is valid when the input is set to TV and ARC in HDMI Setup is set to ON See HDMI Setup on page 70 his can only be selected for Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus DTS DTS Express PCM 48 kHz or less or analog input signals c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected The presence or absence of effects depends on the listening mode d Theinitially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD You shouldn t have any problems using this with most SACD discs but if the sound distorts it is best to switch the gain setting back to OdB e he HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations e The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver s HDMI audio and video input signals from the TV with the receiver s power in the standby mode See About synchronized operations on page 71
127. Use 1 4 to select PIN then press ENTER Use 1 4 to select one of PIN codes 0000 1234 or 8888 then press ENTER You can use any of 0000 1234 or 8888 PIN codes B uetooth wireless technology device using any other PIN code cannot be used with this receiver 5 Press the RETURN button twice to exit Bluetooth Setup 6 Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology device that you want to make pair place it near the receiver and set it to the pairing mode mh WN 7 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter the PIN code selected in step 4 8 Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device If the receiver and B uetooth wireless technology device are not paired start over from step 6 A Note e The PIN code may in some cases be referred to as PASSKEY e For information on enabling pairing on the B uetooth wireless technology device connection procedures etc see the B uetooth wireless technology device s operating instructions Basic playback Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology device with your system 1 Press ADPT on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input The ADAPTER PORT input can also be selected by pressing SOUND RETRIEVER AIR on the receiver In this case the optimum listening mode SOUND RETRIEVER AIR is selected automatically 2 From the Bluetooth wireless technology de
128. W Continuous Power Output 1 kHz 6 Q 1 0 In case of SC 68 gore P 190 W 190 W T E Tm T 190 W SN uestem dS EFE been MED EPUM p UN PENNE 190 W 190W we UIcgedisRec de OT OE o S een here ene eer ore 190 W 190 W Font SION FOTW Oi RTT aden i ninasiannmobiebeiddana waned EN ASAA REE EEE EE EATA OE RASERAS 190 W 190 W In case of SC 67 FORE AT Q 180 W 180 W RI TT X 180 W UIC PRETEND REM m 180 W 180W SUNON DACK MERITO T No mo m 180 W 180W micuen eurigdienhlls eTT 180 W 180W Continuous Power Output 1 kHz 4 Q 1 0 96 In case of SC 68 mio RR u 250 W 250 W iR UU eem 200 W BM NENNEN Nem 250 W 250 W SUT MO T c aT T IET 250 W 250 W aues eM amg ak S E 0 nr 00 A errr eee see er ee 250 W 250 W In case of SC 67 ale M cect rca see cise care ie pom ac eaves cpm vt reece poo eee nr asec eaneesoneeteta 230 W 230 W CONO EE 230 W SU H 230 W 280 W SUUNDA terse enim and esque dn vr bred E E vi bva rake IMP INDEM EUM IM D ec senna nad ainda UE 230 W 280 W Front aimed UA C614 ta 1G CREE To SS re eee eee 230 W 230 W Total
129. When installing this unit make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation at least 20 cm at top 10 cm at rear and 20 cm at each side WARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating To prevent fire hazard the openings should never be blocked or covered with items such as newspapers table cloths curtains or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed D3 4 2 1 7b A1 En INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED magnitude to constitute a risk of electric SERVICE PERSONNEL literature accompanying the appliance D3 4 2 1 1 A1 En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity 5 C to 35 C 41 F to 95 F less than 85 RH cooling vents not blocked Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight or strong artificial light D3 4 2 1 7c A1 En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel If connected to an AC outlet the cut off plug can cause severe electrical shock Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal The equipment should be disconnected by r
130. age 45 or Reverb Measurement operation depending on the standing wave control setting differences may appear on the reverb graph With the Auto MCACC function the rever berations are measured with the standing waves controlled so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated By contrast the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves so the graph indi cates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself with the standing waves as such we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function e Advanced EQ Setup Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration based on the reverb measurement of your listening area Note that customizing system calibra tion using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 90 and is not necessary if you re satisfied with these settings 3 If you selected Reverb Measurement select EQ ON or EQ OFF and then START The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in Reverb View e EQ OFF You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this receive
131. akers application on page 19 and Bi amping your speakers on page 23 e When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected only the volume and channel levels can be set e With MULTI CH IN inputs it is possible to play pictures simultaneously For details see Multi Channel Input setup on page 104 1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the proper output setting For example you might need to set your DVD player to output multichannel analog audio 2 Use INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel e Depending on the DVD player you re using the analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be too low In this case the output level of the subwoofer can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in Other Setup For details see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 104 Basic playback Playing an iPod This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver Here we describe the procedure for playback on an iPod For playback on a USB device see Playing a USB device on page 52 amp Important e This receiver is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano 3G 4G 5G 6G audio only for the iPod nano 6G iPod touch 1G 2G 3G 4G iPhone iPhone 3G iPhone 3GS iPhone 4 iPhone 4S iPad and iPad 2 However some of the functions may be restricted
132. all these functions and settings One of two settings can be selected for the Operation Mode Expert and Basic e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT terminal and the TV s HDMI input are con nected with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings amp Important e Many of the settings and functions cannot be selected when the Operation Mode is changed to Basic 1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select Operation Mode Setup from the Home Menu 3 Select the Operation Mode setting you want e Expert default Users can set all the functions by themselves e Basic he number of operable functions is restricted and functions whose operations are restricted are automatically set to achieve the Pioneer recommended sound and picture quality The functions that can be operated are shown below They can be set as necessary by referring to the operating instructions Descriptions Operable functions items HOME MENU Full Auto MCACC Makes high precision sound field settings easily 45 Input Name Input names can be changed as desired for easier use 41 Input Skip Inputs not being us
133. and Full Band Phase Control zusenden HD RUM RI Uh I n RD eO Pet exero 61 Connecting reyigcieiei ime RET I 18 RESI MC 18 p a ooo 07 Playback with NETWORK features Determining the speakers application PEN NET Tr 19 Pee 64 celere ci CT E T LOO OL LL E 22 at i SPEM T di AM EL LN Ed MM MCN dM C M MM OMA NM M CUM M CMM MANU G5 Connecting the speakerS NN OU T TETTE NU 22 SOUS SUUM see oi UM sud s AUR X fU a UNI UU ZOOM DIO DB Russie a tere Enn C DN deni chum uacM Ma Glddpi n cau bd t baf pata cba tetra eta feta btdudn 66 igewelliniem e Nec MS UNT T o tr tte a 0 ttre ereerren a a en eer et 24 Diss FAUT EO IAS EH ie secs ecco obseccccacreee ccccate ase 0 feestoncocees arsecapatesa dmrccecaneatnsesase cach teteeaanenssbedoar aessasten ch ote 99 About playable file formats vei eese terrere iter rte rte ite itte rte irent 68 PDDUETIS VICO DOIVBP EB o Gps P errr dubias pases UM NERIS MEDIIS Mau EUM rrr err rey ere 29 Pe TINA NNNM 39 08 Control with HDMI function Connecting your TV and playback COMpONEn S usncdtensriintbefiebadi dte diruta vtea nnda rb odes td arr hat oko rt aiu 30 About the Control with HDMI fu nction PE EE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE 10 Connecting an HDD DVD recorder BD recorder and other video sources sssssee enne 33 MRE C OA AS OE OG MEMENTO ee et rre 10 Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other
134. ano iPod touch Tunes and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries The AirPlay logo is a trademark of Apple Inc About SiriusXM Siriusxm INTERNET RADIO Hardware and subscription sold separately SiriusXM service automatically renews and you will be billed at then current rates until you call us at 1 866 635 2349 to cancel See our Customer Agreement for complete terms at www siriusxm com Canadian service available at www sirius ca or www xmradio ca Be sure to read these agreements before you purchase your subscription Sirius XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc All rights reserved Additional information About FLAC FLAC Decoder Copyright 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the follow ing disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
135. are Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned cor the front right speaker rectly see The Input Setup menu on page 47 These indicators do not light if playback is paused EEG CHIC oa INI A a Check the playback especially the digital output settings of the source component If you forget exactly where the microphone should be positioned or if there are prob lems after the procedure has been performed repeatedly re calibrate the distance using the Full Auto MCACC procedure then without moving the microphone redo the When playing Dolby Digital or DTS Sources the receiver s format indica tors do not light Check that the player is connected using a digital connection Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on Precision Distance adjustment page 60 With the receiver in standby press STANDBY ON for about 5 seconds while holding Check that the player isn t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to down SPEAKERS to disable the key lock POM The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected The disc may not contain 5 1 6 1 channel material Check the disc packaging for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc When playing certain discs none of ging the power cord the re
136. ary for each setting pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen Auto Power Down The power can be set to turn off automatically if no operation has been performed for a specific amount of time with no audio or video signals being input to the receiver When using ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 power can also be set to turn off but for ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 the power turns off automatically after the amount of time set here even if signals are being input or operations have been performed Different times can be set for the main zone ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 1 Select Auto Power Down from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the zone you want to set and set the time after which the power turns off e MAIN The time can be selected from among 15 min 30 min 60 min and OFF The power turns off after there has been no signal and no operation for the selected time e ZONE2 he time can be selected from among 30 min 1 hour 3 hours 6 hours 9 hours and OFF The power turns off after the selected time e ZONE 3 The time can be selected from among 30 min 1 hour 3 hours 6 hours 9 hours and OFF The power turns off after the selected time e ZONE 4 The time can be selected from among 30 min 1 hour 3 hours 6 hours 9 hours and OFF The power turns off after the selected time A Note e Depending on the connected device
137. ass and treble for ZONE 2 can be adjusted When BYPASS is selected the original sound is played as such When ON is selected the BASS and TREBLE can be adjusted The ZONE 2 TONE effect is valid when Speaker System is set to 7 1ch FH FW ZONE 2 5 1ch Bi Amp ZONE 2 or 5 1ch ZONE 2 3 When set to 7 1ch ZONE 2 the ZONE 2 TONE effect is not applied 10 Adjust the bass BASS and treble TREBLE to your tastes This can only be set when ZONE 2 is selected in step 2 and ON is selected in step 8 The BASS and TREBLE can each be adjusted between 10 0dB and 10 0dB in 1 dB steps 11 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu EXTENSION Setup e Default setting OFF A separately sold the CU RF100 can be used to operate the receiver by RF communications To do so set the EXTENSION setting to ON When ON is set here the receiver can be operated even when the receiver is in the standby mode 1 Select EXTENSION Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the EXTENSION setting you want 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu A Note e This cannot be set when Basic is selected for the Operation Mode Change the operation mode to Expert page 48 e ZONE 4 cannot be operated when using the CU RF100 omni directional remote control separately sold On Screen Display Setup When the receiver is operated its status the input name listening mode etc is
138. ble below for notes on this 3 Use to set as necessary See the table below for the options available for each setting 4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu Video parameter menu Setting V CONV Digital Video Converter lt a gt RES Resolution lt b gt PCINEMA PureCinema lt c e gt P MOTION Progressive Motion lt c e gt STREAM Stream Smoother lt e gt What it does Converts video signals for output from the HDMI OUT connector for all video types see page 29 Specifies the output resolution of the video signal when video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch 480p indicates the 480p 576p resolution setting This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning cir cuit for playing film materials Normally set it to AUTO If the picture seems unnatural switch this to ON or OFF Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive This improves elements that reduce picture quality mainly noticeable in network contents such as mosquito noise and block noise When AUTO is selected this unit s Stream Smoother function automatically turns on when network contents are played on the player supporting Stream Smoother Link and connected to this unit by HDMI assuming that integrated operation with the Control with HDMI functio
139. bove 2 Note When listening sources in OO Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT mode you can also adjust the H GAIN effect see Setting the Audio options on page 74 e When listening to 2 channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode there are three further parameters you can adjust C WIDTH DIMENSION and PANORAMA See Setting the Audio options on page 4 to adjust them e When listening to 2 channel sources in Neo X Cinema Neo X Music or Neo X Game mode you can also adjust the C GAIN effect see Setting the Audio options on page 74 e When listening through headphones you can select STEREO mode only Using the Home THX modes THX and Home THX are technical standards created by THX Ltd for cinema and home theater sound Home THX is designed to make home theater audio sound more like what you hear in a cinema Different THX options will be available depending on the source and the setting for surround back channel pro cessing see THX Audio Setting on page 100 for more on this 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode 2 Press THX HOME THX to select a listening mode With two channel sources press THX repeatedly to select a matrix decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode see THX Audio Setting on page 100 for an explanation of each process e THX CINEMA e THX MUSIC e THX GAMES DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX CINEMA e DO PRO LOGIC THX CINEMA e Neo X CINEMA THX CINEMA X1 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX MUSIC e Neo X MUSIC THX MUSIC
140. bps VBR CBR Supported Supported Sampling frequency 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz m4a c MPEG 4 AAC LC Quantization bitrate 16 bit AAC poen MPEG 4 HE AAC Channel ch SUP aacPlus v1 2 392 ran Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps VBR CBR Supported Supported 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Sampling frequency 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz jos flac FLAC 192 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit 24 bit Channel 2 ch Sampling frequency 2 8224 MHz DSD dff DSDIFF EE HTC o C ud aisi DSF Quantization bitrate 1 bit Channel 2 ch a MPEG Layer 3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported specifi cally Pro Lossless Voice c Apple lossless encoding is not supported d Uncompressed FLAC files are not supported Pioneer does not guarantee playback e DSDfiles cannot be played in the sub zone Photo files Category Extension Format Meeting the following conditions JPEG Jpg e Baseline JPEG format Y Cb Cr 4 2 2 Basic playback Playing an MHL compatible device MHL Mobile High definition Link is an interface standard for transmitting digital signals with mobile devices MHL can carry high quality multi channel audio data and full HD video formats The MHL compatible device s video signals are output from the TV connected to the receiver the audio signals are output from the speakers connected to
141. built in DHCP server func tion it is necessary to set up the network manually For details see Network Setup menu on page 100 LAN terminal specifications e LAN terminal Ethernet jack 10BASE T 100BASE TX A Note e Refer to the operation manual of the equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method may differ depending on your Internet environment e When using a broadband Internet connection a contract with an Internet service provider is required For more details contact your nearest Internet service provider Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER When the Bluetooth ADAPTER AS BT100 or AS BT200 is connected to this receiver a product equipped with bluetooth wireless technology portable cell phone digital music player etc can be used to listen to music wirelessly e he Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device must support A2DP profiles e Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection and operation of this unit with all B uetooth wireless technology enabled devices he Air Jam function cannot be used with the AS BT100 Bluetooth ADAPTER ADAPTER PORT OUTPUT 5V 0 1 A MAX amp Important e Do not move the receiver with the b uetooth ADAPTER connected Doing so could cause damage or faulty contact Switch the receiver into standby and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT e For instructions on playing the b uetooth wireless technology device se
142. ce to the speakers their position with a precision of under 0 5 inch Here rather than cor rect the numerical value of the distance actually move the physical positions of the speakers to fine adjust the subwoofer cannot be adjusted The input from the microphone is indicated on the screen Fine adjust the posi tions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum The detailed distance adjustments that were previ ously performed by skilled installers by ear can easily be performed watching the gauge on the monitor Place the microphone in the same position as when the microphone was connected and the Full Auto MCACC operation was performed 1 Select Precision Distance from the Manual MCACC setup menu The Advanced MCACC menu 2 Fine adjust the positions of the speakers in sequence starting from the front right channel Test pulses are output from the speaker for the selected channel and from one other speaker Move the position of the selected speaker 0 5 inch towards or away from the microphone Watch the screen when doing so and fine adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum Also the channel serving as the standard differs according to the channel being adjusted Do not move the speaker serving as the standard channel The maximum gauge reading is 10 0 If the reading stays under 10 0 adjust the speaker for the maximum value e f the microphone is placed in a different position from when
143. ceiver s format indicators light Do not pull out the power cord while conducting the settings The settings will be stored when both the main zone and sub zone turn off Turn off all zones before pulling out the power cord Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 60 If atwo channel soundtrack is currently playing including Dolby Surround encoded then this is not a malfunction Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available When playing a disc with the listen ing mode set to Auto Surround or ALC D0 Pro Logic Il or DTS Neo X When Operation Mode is set to Basic the Pioneer recommended settings are made and appear on the receiver not all of the functions can be used To use all of the functions without restrictions set Operation Mode to Expert see Operation Mode Setup on page 48 During playback of DVD Audio the display shows PCM This will occur when playing DVD Audio material over the HDMI connection This is not a malfunction Professional Calibration EQ graphical output Symptom The reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration does not appear entirely flat EQ adjustments made using the Manual MCACC setup do not appear to change the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration Lower frequency response curves do not seem to have been calibrated for SMALL speakers Calibration is performed but due to your speaker
144. compatible monitor DVD player etc o o LLL le 0000 O nummum Select one DIGITAL OUT o B Select one COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT R Wo L VIDEO OUT HDMI IN ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO PB Pr uA e f you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver connect the receiver and TV with audio cables page 30 When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections if the TV supports the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function the sound of the TV can be input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal so there is no need to connect an audio cable In this case set ARC at HDMI Setup to ON see HDMI Setup on page 70 e f you use an optical digital audio cable you ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you connected the player to see The Input Setup menu on page 47 Connecting your equipment e n order to listening to HD audio with this receiver connect an HDMI cable and use analog video cable for video signal input Connecting your TV with no HDMI input This diagram shows connections of a TV with no HDMI input and DVD player or other playback component to Depending on the player it may not be possible to output video signals to both HDMI and other video output the receiver composite etc simultaneously and it may be necessary to make video output settings Please refer to the a operating instructions supplied with your player for
145. cone ues ide ceases cee set coe ER PERO USE CHEER eect 80 Dimming tne display ui ascsi otc dk Env ra nave iad iud a CENA ave Ur v eE Nw V E Ud idS 80 Switching the HDMI OCG eme 80 Checking your system SCTUINGS sist ciccicasescccenrsscccentsussasusnsnesuesnndesiavencceeavsusstsusnsedsuesnuncdterescsuuavenduceuses 80 Resetting the SVSEPIHIE ue caesar cases cesses cee este onm neces Poder E rU oesadeeeseeoaeee cases 81 Using other functions Setting What it does Option s With the Auto Sound Retriever function DSP processing is used to OFF compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression improving the sound s sense of density and modulation Setting the Audio options There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu The defaults if not stated are listed in bold p ME Reeven Also when a player supporting the Sound Retriever Link function is amp ans connected to the receiver by HDMI by setting this to ON the bitrate ON Important information of the compressed audio file being played on the player e Note that if a setting doesn t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu it is unavailable due to the current source settings and status of the receiver 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode then press AUDIO PARAMETER 2 Use f to select the setting you want to adjust DNR Depending on the cur
146. d AVNavigator CD ROM contains Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the receiver s connections and initial settings in dialog fashion High precision initial settings can be completed easily simply by following the instructions on the screen to make the connections and settings There are also other features enabling easy use of various functions including an Interactive Manual that oper ates in association with the receiver updating of various types of software and MCACC Application that lets you check the MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs Installing AVNavigator 1 Load the included CD ROM into your computer s CD drive The CD ROM s top menu screen appears 2 Click Install AVNavigator from the CD ROM top menu 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to install When Finish is selected installation is completed 4 Remove the included CD ROM from the computer s CD drive Handling the CD ROM Operating Environment e AVNavigator can be used with Microsoft Windows XP Vista T e A browser is at times used for AVNavigator functions The supported browser is Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or 9 Adobe Flash Player 10 must be installed to use some of the functions in AVNavigator For details see http Awww adobe com downloads Before you start Precautions For Use e his CD ROM is for use with a personal computer It cannot be used with a DVD player or music CD player Attempting to play this CD ROM with a DVD player
147. d a separate TV and a separate amplifier and speakers for your secondary sub zone ZONE 3 You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the speaker terminals for your primary sub zone For details see MULTI ZONE setup using speaker terminals ZONE 2 on page 38 Also if the separate receiver in the sub zone has an HDMI input terminal this unit s HDMI input can be played as ZONE 4 Here are three primary sub zone setups possible with this system Choose whichever works best for you MULTI ZONE listening options The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2 ZONE 3 and ZONE 4 Sub Zone Input functions available DVD SAT CBL DVR BDR VIDEO INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM PANDORA MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES iPod USB USB DAC SC 68 only TV CD TUNER ADAPTER ZONE 2 PORT Outputs analog audio composite video and component video DVD SAT CBL DVR BDR VIDEO INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM PANDORA MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES iPod USB USB DAC SC 68 only TV CD TUNER ADAPTER ZONE 3 PORT Outputs analog audio composite video ZONE 4 BD DVD SAT CBL DVR BDR VIDEO HDMI 5 MHL HDMI Outputs HDMI audio and video signals e tis not possible to down convert the audio and video input signals from the HDMI input terminals digital input terminals OPTICAL and COAXIAL and the COMPONENT VIDEO input terminals and output them to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 e When any of the INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM PANDORA MEDIA SERV
148. d base unit wireless LAN router etc e he wireless LAN converter must be set in order to establish wireless LAN connections For details see the CD ROM included with the wireless LAN converter The IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter do not match the settings of the wireless LAN router etc e Check the IP address settings of the receiver and wireless LAN converter including the DHCP setting If the receiver s DHCP setting is ON turn the receiver s power off then turn the power back on Check that the IP addresses of the receiver and wireless LAN converter match the settings of the wireless LAN router etc If the receiver s DHCP setting is OFF set an IP address matching the network of the base unit wireless LAN router etc For example if the wireless LAN router s IP address is 192 168 1 1 set the receiver s IP address to 192 168 1 XXX 1 the subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 the gateway and DNS to 192 168 1 1 Next set the wireless LAN converter s IP address to 192 168 1 249 2 1 Set the XXX in 192 168 1 XXX to a number between 2 and 248 that is not assigned to other devices 2 Set the 249 in 192 168 1 249 to a number between 2 and 249 that is not assigned to other devices Try making the wireless LAN converter s advanced settings e The wireless LAN converter can be connected to a computer to make the advanced wireless LAN settings For details see the CD
149. d may not be smooth when playing Internet radio About list of Internet radio The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created edited and managed by the vIuner database service exclusively for use with this receiver For details about vTuner see vIuner on page 123 Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations See Playing back your favorite songs on page 66 for more on this e To listen to Internet radio stations you must have high speed broadband Internet access With a 56 K or ISDN modem you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio e The port number varies depending on the Internet radio station Check the firewall settings e A list of Internet radio stations provided by the vluner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons e Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted depending on the Internet radio station In this case you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site With the receiver broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and played Check the access code required for registration on the receiver use this access code to access the special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your fa
150. d on how you have configured the Speaker system set ting on page 98 If you have two subwoofers the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction In this case the same sound is output from the two subwoofers e o hear sound only from the pre outs switch the speaker terminals to SP OFF page 78 or simply disconnect any speakers that are connected directly to the receiver It is also possible to hear sound only from the pre outs by switching the AMP setting to OFF and setting the pre amp mode to turn the power amplifiers for all channels off see Setting the Audio options on page 74 Connecting your equipment Connecting the multichannel analog inputs Connecting AM FM antennas SC 68 only Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below To improve reception and sound quality For your Blu ray Disc player and DVD player may have 5 1 6 1 or 7 1 channel analog outputs depending on connect external antennas see Connecting external antennas on page 37 whether your player supports surround back channels Make sure that the player is set to output multichannel analog audio DVD player etc Select one HDMI OUT VIDEO OUT SUBWOOFER FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK VIDEO OUTPUT e i OUTPUT OUTPUT i OUTPUT i a 1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM ante
151. d on the OSD screen for certain inputs but the OSD screen is only displayed when the receiver and TV are connected with an HDMI cable If the receiver and TV are connected with anything other than an HDMI cable perform the various operations while watching the front panel Turning off the sound Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also restores the sound Press MUTE Playing a source with HDMI connection Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function connected to the receiver s HDMI input terminals You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing HDMII on the remote control repeatedly e Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 74 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV no sound will be heard from this receiver e If the video signal does not appear on your TV try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or dis play Note that some components such as video game units have resolutions that may not be converted In this case use an analog video connection Selecting the multichannel analog inputs SC 68 only If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as above you must select the analog multichannel inputs for surround sound playback e When the center or Surround speakers are bi amped no sound is produced even when MULTI CH IN is selected Check Determining the spe
152. ded Use the remote control s SIGNAL SEL button 4 Prepare the recorder Insert a blank tape MD video etc into the recording device and set the recording levels Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically check the component s instruction manual if you re unsure 5 Start recording then start playback of the source component Using other functions Network settings from a web browser Network settings and Pandora or SiriusXM account settings can be made using the browser on a computer con nected to the same LAN as the receiver 1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver 2 Turn on the computer s power and launch the Internet browser 3 Input the receiver s IP address into the browser s address input field For example if the receiver s address is 192 168 1 2 input http 192 168 1 2 Check the receiver s IP address at Checking the Network Information on page 101 When connected with the receiver the Web Control screen appears in the browser 4 When the Web Control screen appears select the item you want to set Using the sleep timer The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the receiver being left on all night Use the remote control to set the sleep timer Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode then
153. dvanced MCACC menu Checking MCACC Data At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 the proce dure of Automatic MCACC Expert on page 90 or after fine adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 92 you can check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen 1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the Screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select MCACC Data Check from the Home Menu 3 Select the setting you want to check Speaker Setting Used to check the settings of the speaker systems See Speaker Setting on page 95 for more on this e Channel Level Used to check the output level of the different speakers See Channel Level on page 95 for more on this Speaker Distance Used to check the distance to the different speakers See Speaker Distance on page 95 for more on this Standing Wave Used to check the standing wave control filter settings See Standing Wave on page 95 for more on this Acoustic Cal EQ Used to check the calibration values of the listening environment s frequency response See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 95 for more on this Group Delay Used to check the speakers group delay both before and after calibration See Group Delay on page 95 for more on this 4 Press RETURN to go back to
154. dy to play music from the iPod e The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver Playing back audio files stored on an iPod To navigate songs on your iPod you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as e This feature is not available for photos on your iPod To display photos switch iPod operation to the iPod see Switching the iPod controls on page 51 Finding what you want to play When your iPod is connected to this receiver you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist artist name album name song name genre or composer similar to using your iPod directly 1 Use f to select a category then press ENTER to browse that category e To return to the previous level any time press RETURN 2 Use f to browse the selected category e g albums e Use to move to previous next levels 3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play then press to start playback A Note e You can play all of the songs in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list For example you can play all the songs by a particular artist Basic playback controls This receiver s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored o
155. e Fine Speaker Distance on page 92 e Standing Wave Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room see Standing Wave on page 93 The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 93 e EQ Adjust Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 93 e EQ Professional Calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room s reverb characteristics see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 93 Precision Distance SC 68 only Fine adjusting the positions of the speakers see Precision Distance on page 94 Fine Channel Level e Default setting 0 0dB all channels You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system You can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0 5 dB increments The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 98 1 Select Fine Channel Level from the Manual MCACC setup menu The volume increases to the 0 0 dB reference level 2 Adjust the level of the left channel This will be the reference speaker level so you may want to keep the level around 0 0dB so that you ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels
156. e MCACC he six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening posi tions Simply choose an unused preset for now you can rename it later in Data Management on page 96 e THX Speaker Select YES when using THX speakers all speakers other than the front speakers are set to SMALL In other cases leave at NO 4 Press RECEIVER then select START 5 Follow the instructions on screen Make sure the microphone is connected and if you re using a subwoofer make sure it is switched on and set to a comfortable volume level 6 Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen A progress report is displayed on screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup Try to be as quiet as possible while it s doing this If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically In this case you don t need to select OK and press ENTER in step e With error messages Such as Too much ambient noise or Check microphone select RETRY after check ing for ambient noise see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 46 and veritying the mic connection If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply select GO NEXT and continue Basic Setup 1a Full Auto MCACC AN RECEIVER KA OK
157. e Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device on page 55 Connecting an iPod This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver iPod iPhone iPad iPod cable supplied 9 e An iPod iPhone iPad can be connected to the receiver For details on supported models and versions of the respective products see Playing an iPod on page 51 Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver e t is also possible to connect using the cable included with the iPod but in this case it is not possible to view pictures via the receiver e For the cable connection also refer to the operating instructions for your iPod e iPod recharging occurs whenever an iPod is connected to this unit Recharging is enabled only when the unit s power is turned on e For instructions on playing the iPod see Playing an iPod on page 51 Connecting a USB device It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver USB 5V 2 1A iPod iPhone iPad USB mass storage device Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver e his receiver does not support a USB hub e For instructions on play
158. e frequency phase characteristics of the front speakers FRONT ALIGN Virtual Surround Back When you re not using surround back speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information Virtual Height When you re not using front height speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers Virtual Wide When you re not using front wide speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel through your front speakers Virtual Depth When this mode is selected the sound field expands virtually to behind the display resulting in a sound field with the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence Auto Sound Retriever The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged arti facts left over after compression With some audio inputs the Sound Retriever effect is automatically optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents that have been input to achieve high sound quality Sound Retriever Air Sound Retriever Air compensates for reduced sound quality due to compression when sending 5 uetooth signals PQLS Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS compatible player with HDMI connections ALC Auto Level Control In the Aut
159. e microphone your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your If Reverse Phase is displayed try the following video component For the component video input however signals are only output from The speaker s wiring and may be inverted Check the speaker connections the HDMI output so when using the component video input set V CONV to ON Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions Reverse Phase Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected If this happens select video or HDMI cables see The Input Setup menu on page 47 GO NEXT and continue deheskihewideosuipubseMagsePiheseumessmgeMENL If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone listening position or when using speakers that affect the phase dipole speakers reflective speakers etc it may not be Check thatthe video input you selected onyourTViscorrect possible to properly identify the polarity Some components such as video game units have resolutions that may not be con After using the Auto MCACC Setup There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air conditioner verted If adjusting this receiver s Resolution setting in Setting the Video options on page the speaker size setting is incorrect motor etc Switch off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again 16 and
160. e power sud Turn down the volume denly switches off Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 92 Switch on the digital safety feature While holding down ENTER on the front panel press STANDBY ON to set this receiver to the standby mode Use TUNE f 4 to select D SAFETY OFF and then use PRESET to select 1 or 2 select D SAFETY OFF to deactivate this feature If the power switches off even with 2 switched on turn down the volume With 1 or 2 on some features may be unavailable The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed Try switching the receiver off then back on again Try disconnecting the power cord then connect again AMP ERR blinks in the display then the power automatically switches off The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on The receiver may have a serious problem Do not try switching the receiver on Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company There is a problem with the receiver s power unit or fan Try turning on the power If the same thing happens the receiver is damaged Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company Other symptoms may appear when the power is turned on The receiver suddenly switches off or the FL OFF indicator blinks FAQ Symptom AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the dis play and the FL OFF indicator flash
161. e set ting to save time if you want When data measurement is taken after selecting ALL or Keep SP System the reverb characteristics data both before and after calibration that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten When measurement is performed with other than SYMMETRY after selecting ALL or Keep SP System the reverberation characteristics after calibration cannot be predicted so the graph for the characteristics after calibration After cannot be displayed If you will need to display the graph for the characteristics after calibration After take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup page 92 The EQ Pro amp S Wave measurement is also taken when ALL or Keep SP System is selected See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 93 for more on this Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset For details see Setting the Audio options on page 74 EQ Type only available when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro amp S Wave This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted After a single calibration is performed each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately in the MCACC memory SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency amplitude characteristics ALL CH ADJ isa flat
162. e with the Precision Distance terminals are matched up properly adjustment The display shows KEY LOCK ON when you try to make settings Most recent settings have been erased The various system settings are not stored Certain listening modes or HOME MENU items cannot be selected Perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure before the Precision Distance adjustment see Do not move the speaker used as the reference point Also adjust in order starting from When adjusting the speaker positions do not move the speakers much only move them Settings are only stored if all the zones are turned off Turn off all the zones before unplug FAQ Remedy Display Check that the speakers are all in phase make sure the positive and negative Symptom Remedy The display is dark or off Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 Place the microphone accurately in the same position as when the Full Auto MCACC procedure was performed The OSD screen is not displayed The OSD screen is not displayed unless the receiver and TV are connected using an HDMI cable If the TV does not support HDMI perform the various operations and make the settings while watching the display on the receiver s front panel You can t get DIGITAL to display when using SIGNAL SEL DX DIGITAL or DTS does not light when playing Dolby DTS softw
163. eappears automatically The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system but itis also possible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setup menu starting below or Manual SP Setup menu starting on page 98 e Depending on the characteristics of your room sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm 5 inches will end up with different size settings You can correct the setting manually using the Manual Speaker setup on page 98 e The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position This set ting should be accurate taking delay and room characteristics into account and generally does not need to be changed e f Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment we recommend adjusting the settings manually You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check screen see Checking MCACC Data on page 95 Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen When you re finished select RETURN to go back to the Home Menu Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup The Advanced MCACC menu Manual MCACC setup You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you re more familiar with the system
164. ecking the effect s b y Reduces mosquito noise distortion generated at the contours of the N Th 7 gt picture upon MPEG compression in the picture The image is only an example for checking the effect l Adjusts saturation from dull to bright ME Bye MNR ML ae 40to 8 gt P a P lt d e gt Default 0 SEE N ade lt 6 to 6 gt Chroma Level The image is only an example for checking the effect A Default 0 Adjusts how sharp edges appear DETAIL lt 0io c8 The image is only an example for checking the effect lt d e gt i Default 0 a n BLK SETUP Sets the black level according to the video input signal 7 5 Black Setup Normally select 7 5 If the dark parts of the picture are all black with gt lt f gt this setting select 0 0 The image is only an example for checking the effect Using other functions Setting What it does Option s Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output atthe HOMI THROUGH ASP l l Aspect output Make your desired settings while checking each setting on ein your display if the image doesn t match your monitor type cropping NORMAL or black bands appear a e Ifthe video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON switch it OFF e When connected to a video device using the component video input set this setting to ON and watch with the HDMI output b When setto a resolution with which the TV monitor i
165. ect the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order Speaker System Specifies how you are using your surround back speaker terminals and B speaker termi nals page 98 Speaker Setting Specifies the size and number of speakers you ve connected page 99 e Channel Level Adjusts the overall balance of your speaker system page 99 Speaker Distance Specifies the distance of your speakers from the listening position page 99 e X Curve Adjusts the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks page 100 THX Audio Setting Specifies whether you are using a THX speaker setup page 100 3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen Speaker system setting e Default setting 9 1ch FH FW There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals with this receiver In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the front height speakers or front wide speakers they can be used for bi amping the speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room 1 Select Speaker System from the Manual SP Setup menu See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 98 if you re not already at this screen 2 Select the speaker system setting e 9 1ch FH FW Select for normal home theater use with front height and front wide speakers in your main speaker
166. ect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver Using a banana plug for the second connection is recommended Bi amping your speakers rf Bi amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers for better crossover performance Your speakers must be bi ampable to do this having separate termi C nals for high and low and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you re using Front right Front left Vos Bi amp compatible Bi amp compatible speaker speaker A CAUTION e Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low terminals These must be removed when you are bi amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier See your speaker manual for more information e f your speakers have a removable crossover network make sure you do not remove it for bi amping Doing so may damage your speakers Connecting your equipment Installing your speaker system B 7 2 channel surround system amp Speaker B connection At the very least front left and right speakers only are necessary Note that your main surround speakers should e Select 7 1ch Speaker B from the Speaker system no always be connected as a pair but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like it must be con See speaker s stem setting on page 98 to do this nected to the left surround back termi
167. ed 3 If 1a Full Auto MCACC AN RECEIVER Speaker System 9 1ch FH FW EQ Type SYMMETRY MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 THX Speaker NO START Return 6 e f you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes the screen saver will appear Select the parameters you want to set e When data measurement is taken the reverb characteristics data both before and after calibration that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten e When measurement is taken of the reverb characteristics data other than SYMMETRY the data are not measured after the correction If you will need to measure after correcting data take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup page 92 the speakers are connected using any setup other than 9 1ch FH FW be sure to set Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC Setup See Speaker system setting on page 98 Speaker System Shows the current settings When this is selected and ENTER is pressed the speaker system selection screen appears Select the proper speaker system then press RETURN to return If you are planning on bi amping your front speakers or setting up a separate speaker system in another room read through Speaker system setting on page 98 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4 EQ Type This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted Normally select SYMMETRY For details see Automatic MCACC Expert on page 90
168. ed are skipped not displayed ET Software Update Updates to the latest version of the software 102 Network Information Checks the receiver s IP address 101 Audio Parameters MCACC i 14 MCACC preset Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory 14 DELAY Adj h lay ti fth I 14 Sound Delays djusts the delay time of the overall sound 14 S RTRV l Wate Sound Retriever Plays compressed sound with high sound quality 14 DUAL l iDwal Mene Dual monaural audio setting res ve Creates a virtual surround back channel sound for playback 14 Virtual Surround Back pies us V HEIGHT Virtual Height Creates a virtual height channel sound for playback 14 V WIDE Virtual Wide Creates a virtual wide channel sound for playback 14 vee Plays with a sound field suited for 3D images 14 Virtual Depth Other functions Descriptions Operable functions items INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECTOR Switches the input 50 VOLUME MUTE Use to set the listening volume 50 LISTENING MODE Selects your favorite listening modes of PQLS Plays using the PQLS function Fall PHASE Phase Control Plays with phase shifting in the low range corrected 61 PHASE Full Band Phase Control The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency phase 61 characteristics of the speakers connected iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT Switches the input to iPod USB and sets the mode allowing operation 54 CONTROL from the iPod az 4 When you re finished press R
169. ed on the volume for that zone is set to the minimum e 80 0dB to OdB When MULTI ZONE is turned on the volume is set to the level set here The volume can be set up to the value set at Volume Limit below 5 Select the Volume Limit setting you want The maximum volume for the zone selected in step 2 can be set e OFF default The maximum volume is not limited e 20 0dB 10 0dB The maximum volume is limited to the value set here 6 Select the Mute Level setting you want The mute level for the zone selected in step 2 can be set This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed e FULL default No sound e 40 0dB 20 0dB The volume will be turned down to the level specified here 7 Adjust Lch Level and Rch Level The channel level for the zone selected in step 2 can be set The level can be adjusted between 12 0dB and 12 0dB in 1 dB steps 8 Select the HPF High Pass Filter setting you want This can only be set when ZONE 2 is selected in step 2 The low frequency component output from the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals is cut When a subwoofer is con nected in Zone 2 we recommend setting this to ON This is only valid when Zone 2 is connected using the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT terminals e OFF default The High Pass Filter function is disabled e ON The High Pass Filter function is enabled 9 Select the TONE setting you want This can only be set when ZONE 2 is selected in step 2 The b
170. ee Manual speaker setup on page 98 Input Setup Specifies what you ve connected to the digital HDMI and component video inputs see Ihe Input Setup menu on page 47 e OSD Language he GUI screen s display language can be changed see Changing the OSD display lan guage OSD Language on page 45 Network Setup Conducts the setup necessary to connect this unit to the network see Network Setup menu on page 100 HDMI Setup Synchronizes this receiver with your Pioneer component supporting Control with HDMI page 69 Other Setup Makes customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver see he Other Setup menu on page 102 MHL Setup Changes the settings related to MHL see MHL Setup on page 104 Manual speaker setup This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance You only need to make these settings once unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers These settings are designed to customize your system but if you re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 it isn t necessary to make all of these settings A CAUTION e The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup are output at high volume 1 Select Manual SP Setup then press ENTER See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 98 if you re not already at this screen 2 Sel
171. elect and use the desired function AVNavigator includes the following functions e Wiring Navi Guides you through connections and initial settings in dialog fashion High precision initial settings can be made easily Operation Guide Describes the receiver s playback operations and how to use several functions through videos and illustrations Interactive Manual Automatically displays the pages explaining the functions that have been operated on the receiver It is also possible to operate the receiver from the Interactive Manual Glossary Displays glossary pages e MCACC Appli Displays Advanced MCACC measurement results vividly on the computer There are special operating instructions for MCACC Application These instructions are included in the AVNavigator Interactive Manual s menus Refer to them when using MCACC Application e Software Update Allows various types of software to be updated Settings Used to make various AVNavigator settings e Detection Used to detect the receiver Deleting the AVNavigator You can use the following method to uninstall delete the AVNavigator from your PC Delete from the Control Panel of the PC From the Start menu click Program PIONEER CORPORATION AVNavigator 2012 IV Uninstall ANNavigator 2012 1V Controls and displays Remote control PRINTER SER TR H PILILIM FONDANE
172. emoving the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time for example when on vacation D3 4 2 2 1a A1 En CAUTION The STANDBY ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power Therefore make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident To avoid fire hazard the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time for example when on vacation D3 4 2 2 2a A1 En IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit i
173. enu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver 1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select System Setup from the Home Menu 3 Select Other Setup then press ENTER 4 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order Auto Power Down Sets the power to turn off automatically when the receiver is not being used e Volume Setup Sets up the volume related operations of this receiver page 102 e Remote Control Mode Setup Sets this receiver s remote control mode page 102 Software Update Use to update the receiver s software and check the version e ZONE Setup Use to make the sub zone related settings page 103 e EXTENSION Setup Allows the CU RF100 to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode page 104 On Screen Display Setup Sets whether or not to display the status on the display when the receiver is oper ated page 104 e SC 68 only Multi Ch In Setup Specifies the optional settings for a multi channel input page 104 Maintenance Mode This is used to receive maintenance from a Pioneer service engineer or custom installer page 104 5 Make the adjustments necess
174. er system using SPEAKERS page 78 17 SLEEP Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode page 80 18 Matrix decoding format indicators e DOPRO LOGIC IIx This lights to indicate D0 Pro Logic OO Pro Logic Ilx decoding page 58 19 S RTRV Lights when the Auto Sound Retriever function is active page 4 20 Character display Displays various system information 21 Remote control mode indicator Lights to indicate the receiver s remote control mode setting Not displayed when set to 1 page 102 Controls and displays Front panel 1 2 ELITE 0 STANDBY ON C 2 ail An si DIoS ETT AUDIO VIDEO iPod iPhone iPad AUTO SURR ALC IPod one IPa PARAMETER ae PARAMETER ONE MULTIZONE SPEAKERS DIRECTCONTROL STREAMDIRECT HOMETHX BAND TUNER EDIT p um Ono ee SEUPMC T wen 2 2 Q em 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 STANDBY ON This switches between standby and on for this receiver 2 INPUT SELECTOR dial Use to select an input function 3 Indicators e ADVANCED MCACC Lights when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu page 74 e FLOFF Lights when off nothing displayed is selected with the display s dimmer adjustment page 80 e HDMI Blinks when connecting an HDMI equipped component lights when the component is connected page 30 iPod iPhone iPad Lights to indicate iPod iPhone iPad is connected page 40 4 Character display see Display on page
175. erly page 40 Use 100BASE TX to access the components on the net work In this case adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control There may be a shortage of bandwidth on the 2 4 GHz band used by the wireless LAN Make wired LAN connections not routed through a wireless LAN Install away from any devices emitting electromagnetic waves on the 2 4 GHz band microwave ovens game con soles etc If this does not solve the problem stop using other devices that emit electromagnetic waves Instead of logging onto the domain log onto the local machine page 65 Check the firewall settings for components on the network Check the connection settings for components on the network and consult with your network service provider if necessary page 100 There are cases where you cannot listen to some Internet radio stations even when they are listed in the list of Inter net radio stations on this receiver page 65 Press NET to set the remote control to the Network func tion mode page 65 USB DAC SC 68 only Symptoms When the USB DAC IN terminal is connected to a PC via USB cable audio files on the PC cannot be played Remedies When using a USB cable to connect the unit s USB DAC IN terminal to a PC in order to play audio files on the PC the proper device driver must be downloaded from the supplied CD ROM AVNavigator and installed on your PC Causes Has the proper device driver bee
176. ers receivers connected to sub zones to the standby mode the connected amplifiers receivers must be installed or connected in such a way that they can receive remote control signals e The power of the amplifiers receivers can be switched to standby with this operation even when using multiple Pioneer amplifiers receivers and their Remote Control Mode have been changed DISCRETE ON Discrete On The Discrete On function lets you perform a series of operations switching to the input you want to play while turning the receiver s power on When the receiver is installed in an AV rack etc and you cannot tell whether the power is set to the on or the standby mode this operation is handy because it allows you to switch to the selected input without switching the receiver s power to standby even if the power is on when the operation is performed Using All Zone Standby 1 Press ALL ZONE STBY DISCRETE ON The LED continues to flash 2 Press RECEIVER The receiver s power switches to standby and all zones are turned off Using Discrete On 1 Press ALL ZONE STBY DISCRETE ON The LED continues to flash 2 Press an input function button you want to play The receiver s power turns on if it was already on it stays on without turning off and the input switches to the input selected here Controlling the rest of your system Resetting the remote control settings Controlling components Use this procedure to reset all the remote
177. es Try using a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications Note that there are cases where even the audio files stored on a USB memory device compatible with the mass storage class specifications are not played back on this receiver page 52 Connect the USB memory device and switch on this receiver page 41 This receiver does not support USB hubs page 52 Switch off and on again this receiver Reconnect the USB device with the receiver switched off Change to an input other than iPod USB then set the input back to iPod USB Check whether the format of your USB memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32 Note that the FAT 12 NTFS and HFS formats cannot be played back on this receiver page 52 See the list of file formats that can be played back on this receiver page 53 iPod Symptoms Causes Remedies iPod is not recognized This receiver recognizes the iPod as Switch off and on again this receiver a fraud Reconnect the iPod with the receiver switched off Change to an input other than iPod USB then set the input back to iPod USB Network Symptoms Causes Remedies Cannot access the network The LAN cable is not firmly con nected The router is not switched on Internet security software is cur rently installed in the connected component The audio component on the net work which has been switched off is switched on Playback does not start while Connecting co
178. es 41 Using te 7m NUUS IIS RE EO TTE 19 Uenga USB CobEC TO Conme Io aue mE 42 Manngamaudio or adio ro o iN e m 19 CORBECUDO TO a WIFelS55 LAIN esinen eE NE tnd a e aranense eiiaoe earan 42 Neo SEUNG S Tom a WeD DIOWSBF arrr E A OHNE 80 COMMECTING GIT PECCIVEE Mm m 42 E laeti cls Cn dic NETTES rrr mr nye 0o o omm 80 Switching components on and off using the 12 volt AGO EY sccswtucs sastibetsamenndanladennsdusawnatacaniaensbond eie tr boe teles o tiro ipebts 43 Dimming the display messa abusus e a NCC MU UE TE ars a a a T NU M DU DM merapt pM n EIS 80 Pugno IM nere Ce Mor 43 ON CUO S REOM OUTO G ea e E A E E 80 CheckiNo your System SENINGS ee t EE Tm 80 Resetting BSS MOS o o 0 m 81 10 Controlling the rest of your system 14 Additional information Aboutthe RETIOIBSOBUTD Men sitos denpaso su texta te Es radii etn an tassel T Aa taspdaa Fd TEET a a A cres T ia 83 Be Me ET VG Sound IY Yel aah etched odii artnet ath aca ee ts dran manca defe anatase atti dad acto aesTonebedeatn 116 iie geldia emen Sid Clea Eel s dc ener ERO 83 esM eet ssa 116 Setting the remote to control other COMMOME NTS ac sies tese ntu rade etr rs reta EY ra oben regni auis ED t ebd 83 ADOUUROO erra ei nse ade teased ev Nein tate isles ete mmm 117 Selecting preset codes directly Cement mn ene o To 0T menm 83 ADOUT SINUSA eee en pet eee cn Geeta mt nr eee ene Ceo rt E et ene etree een one een ere 117 Programming signals from ot
179. eset it to delete the data See Resetting the system on page 81 Pandora the leading internet radio service gives people music they love anytime anywhere through personalized radio stations Playing back audio files stored on components on the network This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network LAN as the receiver This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices e PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 installed e PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with Windows Media Player 12 installed e DLNA compatible digital media servers on PCs or other components Playback with NETWORK features Playing back your favorite songs Up to 64 favorite tracks on the media server and or Internet radio stations can be registered in the Favorites folder Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the Favorites folder 1 Press NET repeatedly to select the INTERNET RADIO or MEDIA SERVER 2 With the track or Internet radio station you want to register selected press Favorite The selected song or Internet radio station is then registered in the Favorite A Note e To delete tracks or Internet radio stations that have been registered set the input to FAVORITES select the track or station to be deleted then press
180. ess 6 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the number button for the backlight mode you want to set e 1 normal mode The backlight is turned on and off with the light button After it lights it turns off auto matically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds e 2 frequent lighting mode The backlight turns on when any button on the remote control is pressed It is turned off with the light button After it lights it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds e 3 eco mode The backlight is turned on and off with the light button After it lights it turns off automati cally if no operation is performed for 5 seconds e 4 off mode The backlight does not turn on even when the light button is pressed If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash the setting has been successfully completed If the LED flashes three times the setting has failed 3 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup About the ALL ZONE STBY All Zone Standby and DISCRETE ON Discrete On functions ALL ZONE STBY All Zone Standby The All Zone Standby can be used to turn all zones to OFF when the receiver s power is switched to standby Also when using separate Pioneer amplifiers receivers for the sub zones they can also be set to standby simultaneously e n order to set the power of amplifi
181. ess ENTER to browse that folder e For high resolution files some time may be required for the photo to appear e To return to the previous level any time press RETURN 2 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play then press ENTER to start playback The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts Basic playback controls Button s What it does ENTER gt Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow E Stops the player and returns to the previous menu Q e Slideshows of photo files can be played while listening to music files by returning to the folder file list display while playing a music file on a USB device then playing the photo files About playable file formats The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats Music files Category Extension Stream Sampling frequency 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit idi mp3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 Channel 2ch Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps VBR CBR Supported Supported 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Sampling frequency 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz WAV wav LPCM ne Quantization bitrate 16 bit 24 bit Channel 2ch Sampling frequency 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Quantization bitrate 16 bit WMA wma TVAE HUBS Channel 2 ch lt b gt BR 8 0 0 Ee Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 k
182. etting from the Network Setup menu 2 Select the port number you want to change 3 Input the port number e Use f to select a character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection e t is not possible to set the same port number more than once 4 If there are other port numbers you want to change repeat steps 2 and 3 A Note e We recommend setting the port number to 23 or within the range of 49152 to 65535 e When the port number is changed network communications between the receiver and AVNavigator are no longer possible In this case click Settings on the AVNavigator s function menu select the IP Address tab and input one of the port numbers set on the receiver side to enable communications with AVNavigator Checking the Network Information The setting status of the following network related items can be checked P Address Check the IP address of this receiver e MAC Address Check the MAC address of this receiver e Friendly Name Friendly Name on page 101 1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select Network Information from the Home Menu Display the setting status of the network related items The System Setup and Other Setup menus The Other Setup menu The Other Setup m
183. figuration SSID Abbreviation of Service Set IDentifier A wireless LAN access point identifier Can be set as desired using up to 32 characters of English letters and numbers Bluetooth function Bluetooth wireless technology A short range wireless communications standard for digital devices Information is exchanged between devices several meters to several tens of meters apart using radio waves It uses radio waves on the 2 4 GHz band which does not require applications for licenses or usage registration for applications conducting wireless exchange of digital information at relatively low speeds such as computer mouses and keyboards mobile phones smart phones text and audio information for PDAs etc Pairing Pairing must be done before you start playback of bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth ADAPTER Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared The pairing step is necessary to register the B uetooth wireless technology device to enable B uetooth communi cations For more details see also the operating instructions of your B uetooth wireless technology device e Pairing is required when you first use the b uetooth wireless technology device and B uetooth ADAPTER e To enable Bluetooth communication pairing should be done with both your system and B uetooth wireless technology device Receiver function Operation Mode This receiver is equi
184. gate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select Data Management from the Home Menu 3 Select the setting you want to adjust e Memory Rename Name your MCACC presets for easy identification see Renaming MCACC presets on page 96 e MCACC Memory Copy Copy settings from one MCACC preset to another see Copying MCACC preset data on page 96 e MCACC Memory Clear Clear any MCACC presets that you don t want see Clearing MCACC presets on page 96 Renaming MCACC presets If you have several different MCACC presets that you re using you may want to rename them for easier identification 1 Select Memory Rename from the Data Management setup menu 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename then select an appropriate preset name Use f to select the preset then m w to select a preset name 3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary then press RETURN when you re finished You will return to the Data Management setup menu Copying MCACC preset data If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ see Manual MCACC setup on page 92 we recom mend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset Instead of just a flat EQ curve this will give you a reference point from which to start e The settings made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 90 1 Select MCACC
185. gnal is transferred through by the Control with HDMI function even when in the standby mode e When anything other than OFF is set for this setting the receiver s HDMI input can be switched even when the receiver is in the standby mode Switch by pointing the remote control at the receiver and pressing the HDMI BD DVD SAT CBL or DVR BDR button e This setting can be used even with devices that are not compatible with the Control with HDMI function e Setting to anything other than OFF increases power consumption in the standby mode 9 Select the 12V Trigger setting you want The component connected to the 12 V TRIGGER jack can be turned on and off when HDMI OUT is switched HDMI OUT 1 HDMI OUT 2 or OFF can be selected Select OFF when you want the component to switch when the input function is switched 10 Select the Speaker B Link setting you want The speaker terminal settings the settings set with the SPEAKERS button can be switched automatically when HDMI OUT is switched by turning the Speaker B Link setting on This is only valid when 7 1ch Speaker B or 5 1ch SP B Bi Amp is selected for the Speaker System setting OFF he speaker terminal settings do not switch automatically when HDMI OUT is switched e ON he speaker terminal settings switch automatically when HDMI OUT is switched For details see Switching the HDMI output on page 80 11 When you re finished press HOME MENU Before using sync
186. he aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high precision The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before Furthermore while it was previously dif ficult to eliminate standing waves this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine adjust the sound field data manually 1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the Home Menu 3 Select Advanced MCACC from the Home Menu then press ENTER 4 Select the setting you want to adjust e Full Auto MCACC See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 for a quick and effective automatic surround setup e Auto MCACC See Automatic MCACC Expert on page 90 for a
187. he front speaker units reproducing mid and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as the front speakers adjust its angle of elevation to point it to the listening position Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height of the ears Step 3 Adjusting the speaker orientation If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same direction the tone will not be the same on the right and left and asa result the sound field will not be reproduced properly However if all the speakers are pointed towards the listening position the sound field will seem cramped Testing by the Pioneer Multi channel Research Group has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area 30 cm 12 inches to 80 cm 81 inches behind the listening position between the surround speakers and the listening position However the sense of sound positioning can differ according to the conditions in the room and the speakers being used In smaller environments in particular when the front speakers are close to the listening position with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward We suggest you use this example of installation as reference when trying out different installation methods Step 4 Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer Placing the subwoofer between the center and front speakers makes even music sources sound
188. her remote CONTIGS asinos util den Rules enu tul Eq RU tar un shea RR bet tcu ht eot 84 ubi Qo Y H 118 Erasing one of the remote control button SOTTTIGIS secet eir ts mtr dena cns e EUH d Dueb ERO abren n hti Ret EEEE na 84 MYA E 118 Erasing all learnt settings that are in one Input FUNCION seiner eccentric tras n on Rad Rak gute Ru tu dk ndn 05 imc M 118 BB Tete mid Dy ged I ae A EE E AEE EEE RM Da a M E 85 Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats ssseee nns 119 PS UN MNS MO GEM IOC NOD E EOS S IUE 85 Peaker o le lage OUE e eon E E Cy fete Renee nme tr Ter encore S 119 About the ALL ZONE STBY All Zone Standby and DISCRETE ON Discrete On functions 85 About messages displayed when using network bie HOPES aactor anon elc eoi eie ida eee mcn EEEn 120 Resetting ie qTemore COMO Set ICE sacdvtavsdlopuind e eHRN Soler eX EEEE E ictu a Rm S pP cantante 86 Important information regarding the HDMI COnnection ese sucacecsivtsise tendadom tases tetensaerantabeeapednm sateen ERR Rt nota dn 121 CONTON CONDONG snis e a a A 86 FV eV Tipe MOI AIT e eae e a T a Saeed a E acon 121 GOSSA ene E E 122 11 The Advanced MCACC menu Features Index nnne nnne nennen irte nennen nnne 125 Viaking receiver settings Trom the Advanced MCACC MENU spe
189. his may not however yield the best bass results Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations In this case try changing the position or direction of speakers If you can t get good results listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best If you re having problems the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers If you select NO for the subwoofer the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE Also the center sur round surround back front height and front wide speakers can t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL In this case all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer The System Setup and Other Setup menus 3 Select X OVER and set the crossover frequency Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer or LARGE speakers e his setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE or the subwoofer and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel e With Full Auto MCACC setup or Auto MCACC setup ALL or Speaker Setting the setting here will not apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically se
190. hnology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus and THX Select Plus Certified amplifiers With THX Loudness Plus home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a surround mix at any volume level A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response This enables users to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume setting THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX listening mode The new THX Cinema THX Music and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of content 117 Additional information About iPod Made for iPod LliPhone JiPad AirPlay Made for iPod Made for iPhone and Made for iPad mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod iPhone or iPad respectively and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod iPhone or iPad may affect wireless performance Apple AirPlay iPad iPhone iPod iPod n
191. hoose whether you want to enable synchronized operations e ON Enabled for the synchronized operations e OFF he synchronized operations disabled 6 Select the ARC setting you want When a IV supporting the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function is connected to the receiver the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal e ON Ihe IV s sound is input via the HDMI terminal e OFF Ihe TV s sound is input from the Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs 7 Select the PQLS setting you want Choose whether to set this unit s PQLS function AUTO or OFF For details about PQLS function see Setting the PQLS function on page 71 e AUTO PQLS is enabled A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors jitter giving you the best possible digital to analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface This is valid as an HDMI function for POLS compatible players e OFF PQLS is disabled 8 Select the Standby Through setting you want It is possible to transfer signals from an HDMI connected player to the TV when this receiver s power is on standby Select the HDMI input whose HDMI signal is to be input for through transfer when in the standby mode When LAST is selected the signal being input to the currently selected HDMI input is transferred When OFF is selected no HDMI input is transferred through when in the standby mode However when Control is set to ON the HDMI si
192. hould be as equidistant as possible to the monitor Position of center speaker and monitor Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the screen makes the overall sound more natural For TVs using Braun tubes however when installing the center speaker on the floor adjust its angle of elevation to point it towards the listening position Diagram as seen from the side Monitor 7 Installation on floor ve e fthe center speaker is not of the shielded type install it away from the TV e When installing the center speaker on top of the monitor place it facing slightly downwards towards the listen ing position Additional information About messages displayed when using network functions Refer to the following information when you come up with a status message while operating the Network functions Status messages Descriptions Connection Down The selected category or Internet radio station cannot be accessed File Format Error Track Not Found Server Error Cannot be played back for some reasons The selected song has not been found anywhere on the network The selected server cannot be accessed Server Disconnected The server has been disconnected Empty There are no files stored in the selected folder License Error The license for the contents to be played back is invalid This is displayed when the fi
193. hronization Once you have finished all connections and settings you must 1 Putall components into standby mode 2 Turn the power on for all components with the power for the TV being turned on last 3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not 4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed About synchronized operations amp Important e Synchronized operations are enabled when Control Mode is set to ON after setting Control in HDMI Setup to ON For details see HDMI Setup on page 70 The Control with HDMI compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below e From the menu screen of the Control with HDMI compatible TV set audio to be played through this receiver and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode e When in the synchronized amp mode you can adjust the receiver s volume or mute the sound using the TV s remote control e When in the synchronized amp mode the synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver s power is turned off To turn the synchronized amp mode back on set audio to be played through the receiver from the TV s menu screen etc This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode e When the synchronized amp mode is canceled the receiver s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI input
194. in your listening area This can have a negative effect on the overall sound especially at certain lower frequencies Depending on speaker placement your listening posi tion and ultimately the shape of your room it results in an overly resonant boomy sound The Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area During playback of a source you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets e Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection 1 Select Standing Wave from the Manual MCACC setup menu 2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control e Filter Channel Select the channel to which you will apply the filter s MAIN all except center channel and subwoofer Center or SW subwoofer e TRIM only available when the filter channel above is SW Adjust the subwoofer channel level to compen sate for the difference in output post filter Freq Q ATT hese are the filter parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth the higher the Q the narrower the bandwidth or range of the attenuation ATT the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust e Default setting ON 0 0dB all channel
195. inal so connection with the TV can be com pleted with a single HDMI cable Network function AirPlay This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming from iPod touch 26 36 46 iPhone iPhone 3G iPhone 3GS iPhone 4 iPhone 4S iPad iPad 2 with iOS 4 2 or later and iTunes 10 1 Mac and PC or later For more information see the Apple website http www apple com DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a cross industry organization of consumer electronics comput ing industry and mobile device companies Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home Additional information vTuner vluner is a paid online database service that allows you to listen to radio and TV broadcasts on the Internet vIuner lists thousands of stations from over 100 different countries around the globe For more detail about vTuner visit the following website http www radio pioneer com This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of NEMS and BridgeCo Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from NEMS and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary aacPlus AAC decoder uses aacPlus developed by Coding Technologies www codingtechnologies com coding tJ fa qu FLAC technologies FLAC Free Lossless Audio Codec is an audio format allows lossless codec Audio is compressed in FLAC with out any l
196. ing the USB device see Playing a USB device on page 52 Connecting your equipment Connecting an MHL compatible device An MHL compatible mobile device can be connected to enjoy full HD videos high quality multi channel audio and photos etc with charge the battery on the receiver Use the MHL cable included with the receiver to connect the device HDMI 5 INPUT MHL 5V 1A MHL enabled device O Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied MHL cable to connect your MHL enabled device to the MHL terminal on the front panel of this receiver e The MHL compatible device is recharged whenever it is connected to this unit Recharging is enabled only when the unit s power is turned on e For instructions on playing the MHL compatible device see Playing an MHL compatible device on page 53 Connecting an HDMI equipped component to the front panel input HDMI 5 INPUT MHL 5V 1A Video camera etc Using a USB cable to connect to a PC SC 68 only By using a USB cable sold separately to connect this unit s USB DAC IN terminal to the USB port on a PC this unit can be used as a D A converter For details regarding the output of signals input to the USB DAC IN terminal see Playing music from a PC on page 54 amp Important e The exclusive driver must be installed on the computer in order to play high sound quality files of over 48 KkHz 24 bits
197. ion of changes in the input audio A speaker switching sound clicking sound will be heard from the receiver at this time If this sound bothers you we recommend to change the speaker terminal option see Switching the speaker terminals on page 78 107 FAQ Symptom Remedy Broadcast stations cannot be Fully extend the FM wire antenna adjust the position for best reception and secure to a selected automatically or there is wall etc considerable noise in radio broad Use an outdoor antenna for better reception see page 37 casts Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna Noise may be caused by interference from motor etc Switch off or move the other eq other equipment such as a fluorescent light uipment or move the AM antenna Noise is output when scanning a DTS CD This is not a malfunction of the receiver The scan function of your player alters the digital information making it unreadable resulting in noise being output Lower the volume when scanning When playing a DTS format LD there Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on is audible noise on the soundtrack page 60 You can only make a digital recording from a digital source and an analog recording from an analog source Can t record audio For digital sources make sure that what you re recording isn t copy protected Subwoofer output is very low To route more signal to the subw
198. is receiver has audio video inputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices including HDD DVD recorders and BD recorders When you set up the receiver you ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to see also he Input Setup menu on page 47 HDD DVD recorder BD recorder etc MEN OF ges EE DVR BDR Select one DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L B HDMI OUT HDD DVD recorder BD recorder etc HDMI DVI compatible monitor HDMI IN am AUDIO IN R ANALOG L e VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO VIDEO COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE IN DVD DVR BDR 29 9 a e n order to record you must connect the analog audio cables the digital connection is for playback only page 213 Connecting your equipment e Even if your set top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal in some cases the sound is output from Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other set top box the digital audio output optical or coaxial and only the video is output from the HDMI output terminal In this Satellite and cable receivers and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so called set top boxes case make the HDMI and digital audio connections as shown below When you set up the receiver you ll need to te
199. ith your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span e f you can t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly e The subwoofer s test tone differs in tone from other channels Adjust so that the sound of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly Note that when adjusting the subwoofer depending on the low frequency response of your speaker it may be difficult to hear the change even when the setting is increased or decreased or when the position of the speaker is changed Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speak ers in your setup depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker ory E 1 l4 When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up press amp to confirm and continue to the next channel e For comparison purposes the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select e f you want to go back and adjust a channel simply use f 4 to select it 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Standing Wave e Default setting ON ATT 0 0dB all filters Acoustic standing waves occur when under certain conditions sound waves trom your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls
200. iusXM Internet Radio on page 66 e Pandora See Listening to Pandora Internet Radio on page 66 e Media server See Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 66 e Favorites See Playing back your favorite songs on page 66 Basic playback controls You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver Note that some buttons are not available for operation depending on the category currently being played back e Press NET to switch the remote control to the network operation mode Favorite BEDE Listening to Internet radio stations Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet There are a large number of Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world Some are hosted managed and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks Whereas terrestrial or OTA over the air radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world as long as there is a connection to the Internet as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region Depending on the Internet line conditions the soun
201. iver beforehand e Set the Control with HDMI to OFF see HDMI Setup on page 70 1 Switch the receiver into standby 2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel press STANDBY ON The display shows RESET lt NOP 3 Select RESET using PRESET then press ENTER on the front panel The display shows RESET OK 4 Press ENTER to confirm OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver has been reset to the factory default settings e Note that all settings will be saved even if the receiver is unplugged Default system settings Setting Default Volume Limit Mute Level Phase Control iPod USB INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM PANDORA MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES Auto Sound Retriever ADAPTER PORT input function Other input functions Sound Delay Dual Mono DRC SACD Gain LFE Attenuate Auto delay Digital Safety ExtendedStereo Other modes Effect Level Center Width Digital Video Converter ON SPEAKERS FH FW ON Speaker System 9 1ch FH FW Front SMALL Center SMALL Speaker Setting jelly inae or SMALL SB SMALLx2 SW YES Surround Position IN REAR Crossover 80 Hz AMP ON X Curve OFF DIMMER Brightest Inputs See Input function default and possible settings on page 47 HDMI HDMI Audio AMP HDMI output HDMI OUT ALL Control OFF Control Mode OFF ARC Audio Return Channel OFF PQLS AUTO Standby Through OFF DSP Power On Level LAST OO PL II Music Options Dimension Panorama Neo X Option
202. l signals are input in surround when multi channel signals are input amp Important e The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the cur rent source settings and status of the receiver Auto playback There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver but the simplest most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode 2 While listening to a source press AUTO ALC DIRECT AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT for auto playback of a source AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before showing the decoding or playback format Check the digi tal format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed e fthe source is Dolby Digital DIS or Dolby Surround encoded the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display When listening to the ADAPTER PORT input the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is selected automatically ALC In the Auto level control ALC mode this receiver equalizes playback sound levels Also the low and high frequency sounds dialogs surround effects etc that are difficult to hear when the vol ume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level This mode is particularly optimum when listening at
203. lapsed may not be correctly displayed 1 Press NET repeatedly to select the category you want to play back It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network Select a category from the following list e INTERNET RADIO Internet radio e SiriusXM Internet radio that supports SiriusXM e PANDORA Internet radio that supports Pandora e MEDIA SERVER Server components on the network FAVORITES Favorite songs currently being registered Depending on the selected category the names of folders files and Internet radio stations are displayed 2 Use t to select the folder music files or Internet radio station to play back and then press ENTER Press f amp to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item When you press ENTER playback starts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item To return to the list screen press RETURN When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds while the list screen is displayed Only audio files with the 42 mark can be played In case of the folders with the C1mark use and ENTER to select the desired folder and audio files 3 Repeatstep 2 to play back the desired song For detailed operating instructions refer to the section shown below e nternet radio stations See Listening to Internet radio stations on page 65 e SiriusXM See Listening to Sir
204. le you have attempted to register in the Favorites folder has Item Already Exists l y already been registered This is displayed when you have attempted to register a file in the Favorites folder but the Favorite List Full inda d Med Favorites folder is already full Additional information Important information regarding the HDMI connection There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver this depends on the HDMI equipped component you are connecting check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information If you aren t receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver from your component please try one of the following configurations when connecting up Configuration A Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI equipped component to the receiver s component video input The receiver can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI sig nal for transmission to the display For this configuration use the most convenient connection digital is recom mended for sending audio to the receiver See the operating instructions for more on audio connections A Note e The picture quality will change slightly during conversion Configuration B Connect your HDMI equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable Then use the most conve nient connection digital is recommended for sending audio to the receiver See
205. les cannot be played back e With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver About playable DLNA network devices This unit allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network LAN as the receiver This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following devices e PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP with Windows Media Player 11 installed e PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with Windows Media Player 12 installed e DLNA compatible digital media servers on PCs or other components Files stored in a PC or DMS Digital Media Server as described above can be played via command from an exter nal Digital Media Controller DMC Devices controlled by this DMC to play files are called DMRs Digital Media Renderers This receiver supports this DMR function When in the DMR mode such operations as playing and stopping files can be performed from the external controller Volume adjustment and the muting control are also possible The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode aside from certain buttons including the VOLUME MUTE and DISP Depending on the external controller being used playback may be interrupted when the volume is adjusted from the controller In this case adjust the volume from the receiver or remote control Using AirPlay on iPod touch iPhone iPad and iTune
206. ll the receiver which input you connected the set top box to see he Input Setup menu on page 47 HDMI DVI compatible monitor Select one DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL Eo HDMI IN HDMI OUT Select one AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL VIDEO OUT VIDEO NA IND SATICBL TV IN H CRT NEEN SAT CBL ey l COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE 7Z 4 M COAXIAL ASSIGNABLE OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE INA IND SATICBL TV 9 e f your set top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal we recommend connecting it to the receiver s HDMI SAT CBL IN terminal When doing so also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI see Connecting using HDMI on page 30 STB HDMI DVI compatible monitor HDMI OUT INH OUTI SAT CBL DVR BDR VIDEO RRR LL Connecting your equipment Connecting other audio components This receiver has both digital and analog inputs allowing you to connect audio components for playback When you set up the receiver you ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to see also The Input Setup menu on page 47 Turntable CD player MD DAT etc ME ms EUR c oco S55 DIGITAL IN OPTICAL Select one AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT R ANALOG L COAXIAL OPTICAL 0 B OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE
207. lutions that may not be converted In this case try switching Digital Video Conversion in Setting the Video options on page 76 OFF The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 4801 5761 480p 576p 720p and 10801 1080p signals cannot be converted For optimal video performance THX recommends switching Digital Video Conversion in Setting the Video options on page 76 OFF High picture quality f Video signals can be output VIDEO MONITOR OUT This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited Connecting your equipment About HDMI Connecting your TV and playback components The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video as well as almost every kind of digital audio This receiver incorporates High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI technology This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections Connecting using HDMI e Digital transfer of uncompressed video contents protected by HDCP 1080p 24 1080p 60 etc f Tou have 22 HDMI or DVI with HDCP equipped component Blu ray Disc player BD etc you can connect it 3D signal transfer to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable Deep Color signal transfer If the IV and playback compone
208. more information Important e f you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver connect the receiver and TV with audio cables e With these connections the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with an HDMI page 30 EM cable Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect the receiver and e f you use an optical digital audio cable you ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you connected the player player to see The Input Setup menu on page 47 Also when the receiver and TV are connected by anything other than an HDMI cable the OSD function allow ing display of the receiver s settings operations etc on the TV s screen cannot be used In this case watch the receiver s front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings DVD player etc Select one Select one Select one COMPONENT VIDEO IN VIDEO IN COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT AUDIO OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL R ANALOG L o Bec ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO s Q Connecting your equipment e f your HDD DVD recorder BD recorder etc is equipped with an HDMI output terminal we recommend con Connecting an HDD DVD recorder BD recorder and other video necting it to the receiver s HDMI DVR BDR IN terminal When doing so also connect the receiver and TV by sources HDMI see Connecting using HDMI on page 30 Th
209. more natural if there is only one subwoofer it doesn t matter if itis placed on the left or right side The low bass sound output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is no need to adjust the height Normally the subwoofer is placed on the floor Put it in a position at which it will not cancel out the bass sound output from the other speakers Also note that placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could excessively amplify the bass sound If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface This can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations but depending on the shape of the room this could result in stand ing waves However even if standing waves are generated their influence on the sound quality can be prevented using the Auto MCACC s standing wave control function page 93 Step 5 Default settings with the Auto MCACC Setup auto sound field correction function It is more effective to perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup page 45 procedure once the adjustments described above have been completed A Note e he distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger than the distance actually measured with a tape measure etc his is because this distance is corrected for electric delay and is not a problem Positional relationship between speakers and monitor Position of front speakers and monitor The front speakers s
210. n tinues to be displayed The component is currently discon nected from this receiver or the power supply Firmly connect the LAN cable page 40 Switch on the router There are cases where a component with Internet security software installed cannot be accessed Switch on the audio component on the network before switching on this receiver Check whether the component is properly connected to this receiver or the power supply Symptoms Causes The PC or Internet radio is not properly operated The corresponding IP address is not properly set The IP address is being automati cally configured The audio files stored on components on the net work such as a PC cannot be played back Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 is not cur rently installed on your PC Audio files recorded in MPEG 4 AAC or FLAC are being played back on Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 The component connected to the network is not properly operated The component connected to the network does not permit file sharing The folder stored on the component connected to the network has been deleted or damaged Network connections could be restricted due to the computer s net work settings security settings etc Supported file formats vary by server As such files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit Cannot access the com ponent connected to the network
211. n installed on the PC No sound is produced when Are volume settings correct for the attempting to play files on OS and application program a PC Is the OS audio output set to MUTE Are multiple applications running simultaneously Raise the volume settings as required Cancel the MUTE setting Try closing applications that are not in use Are volume settings correct for the For audio device select Pioneer USB Audio Device OS and application program High sound quality files The exclusive driver is not installed over 48 kHz 24 bits cannot on the computer be played Install the driver software on the computer from the included CD ROM AVNavigator Web Control Symptoms Causes Remedies This receiver s IP address has not been entered into the browser cor rectly Web Control screen is not displayed on browser Check the receiver s IP address and enter it correctly in the browser page 100 Receiver settings cannot be JavaScript is disabled on the internet Enable JavaScript made from a browser browser The browser is not compatible with JavaScript Use an internet browser that is compatible with JavaScript FAQ Wireless LAN Network cannot be accessed via wireless LAN Wireless LAN converter s power is not on Wireless LAN converter s Power WPS and Wireless indica tors are not all lit e Check that the USB cable connecting the wireless LAN converter to the
212. n an iPod e Press iPod USB to switch the remote control to the iPod USB operation mode i B B Switching the iPod controls You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver 1 PressiPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls This enables operation and display on your iPod and this receiver s remote control and GUI screen become inactive 2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver controls v Note e Change the receiver s input to the iPod in one action by pressing the iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL button on the front panel to enable iPod operations on the iPod Basic playback Playing a USB device It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver e Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives portable flash memory drives particularly key drives and digital audio players MP3 players of format FAT16 32 e Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility operation and or bus power with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver 1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV oee Connecting a USB device on page 41 About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup e Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device 2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod USB
213. n is set Stream Smoother Link Option s ON OFF AUTO PURE 480p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080 24p AUTO ON OFF 4 410 44 Default 0 OFF ON AUTO Using other functions Setting What it does Option s Setting What it does Option s PDP Adjusts the overall brightness Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that is con V AD nected Select PDP for plasma displays LCD for liquid crystal moni ACD x md dos l tors FPJ for front projectors PRO for professional monitors If you FPJ Advanced Video Adjust l l l lt want to adjust the picture quality settings to your personal tastes PRO select MEMORY woo Brient 4 610 46 Brightness Default 0 Reduces noise in the luminance Y signal lt d e gt 0 YNR lt 401048 3 lt d e gt Default 0 The image is only an example for checking the effect rr Adjusts the contrast between light and dark EE o pp The image is only an example for checking the effect Reduces noise in the input s color C signal CONTRAST 4 6to 6 gt CNR lt 0to 8 gt d Default 0 lt d e gt Default 0 Reduces block noise block shaped distortion generated upon MPEG Adjusts the red green balance compression in the picture TES BNR lt 40to 8 gt lt d e gt Default 0 HUE E be tow lt 6to 6 gt lt d e gt ene I D Default 0 The image is only an example for ch
214. n successfully completed Direct function e Default setting On You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time using your receiver to playback a different component This could let you for example use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player When direct function is on any component you select using the input function buttons will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control When you turn direct function off you can operate the remote control with out affecting the receiver 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 5 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control 3 Press 1 On or 0 Off to switch the direct function mode If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash the setting has been successfully completed If the LED flashes three times the setting has failed 4 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup Setting the backlight mode e Default setting 1 normal mode The backlight lighting pattern can be selected from among four modes in consideration of convenience and battery service life 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then pr
215. nal e When only connecting one surround back speaker connect it to the SURROUND BACK L Single terminals A 9 2 channel surround system Front height Front wide connection Front height right Front height left e f necessary select 9 1ch FH FW from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 98 to do this e When only connecting one surround back speaker connect it to the SURROUND BACK L Single terminals Subwoofer 1 Front height right Front height left LINE LEVEL INPUT Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 LINE LEVEL NPUT FRONT HEIGHT suRRouND BACK LY R L R R L R L L 5 longo 36 9 9 C 7 2 channel surround system amp Front Bi amping connection High quality surround e Select 7 1ch Front Bi Amp from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 98 to do this e When only connecting one surround back speaker connect it to the SURROUND BACK L Single terminals Bi amp compatible speaker Front right Bi amp compatible speaker Front left Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 LINE LEVEL INPUT surRouND Back EY L Single SURROUND Surround back right Connecting your equipment D 7 2 channel surround system Surround back amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone e Select 7 1ch ZONE 2 from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 98 to do this e When only connecting one surround back speaker connect it
216. nd expansion Internet Radio By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal you can listen to Internet radio stations e Bluetooth compatible Using the B uetooth ADAPTER AS BT100 or AS BT200 lets you enjoy music files on an iPhone or other B uetooth wireless technology device wirelessly Auto Sound Retriever The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged arti facts left over after compression Easy setup using Advanced MCACC The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup which includes the advanced fea tures of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ Before you start Installing the receiver e When installing this unit make sure to put it on a level and stable surface e Don t install it on the following places on a color TV the screen may distort near a cassette deck or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field This may interfere with the sound in direct sunlight indamp or wet areas in extremely hot or cold areas in places where there is vibration or other movement in places that are very dusty jin places that have hot fumes or oils such as a kitchen e Do not touch this receiver s bottom panel while the power is on or just after it is turned off The bottom panel becomes hot when the power is on or right after it is turned off and could cause burns Loading the batteries
217. nel digital contents Apple AirPlay With AirPlay you can stream music from iTunes to the SC 68 and SC 67 and play it through your home cinema system You can even use the receiver to view metadata including song title artist as well as album art on a con nected display With Pioneer s AirPlay compatible receivers you can easily enjoy your iTunes music in any room in the house Air Jam App compatible For the SC 68 and SC 67 the optional AS BT200 Bluetooth adapter works together with Pioneer s exclusive Air Jam application Available free App in App Store and Android Market Air Jam allows up to 4 iPhone iPod touch iPad or Android devices to share music and create a group playlist for a unique and fun social music network experience MHL Mobile High definition Link compatible device playback An MHL compatible mobile device can be connected to enjoy full HD videos high quality multi channel audio and photos etc with charge the battery on the receiver e USB DAC SC 68 only Music files on a computer can be played by connecting the receiver with the computer using a commercially available USB cable Files can be played with high sound quality when the exclusive driver is installed on the computer The driver software can be installed from the included CD ROM AVNavigator e AVNavigator The CD ROM AVNavigator included with this unit provides a variety of functions such as Wiring Navi with a guide for connecting the
218. nna wires 2 Push open the tabs then insert one wire fully into each terminal then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires 3 Fixthe AM loop antenna to the attached stand To fix the stand to the antenna bend in the direction indicated by the arrow fig a then clip the loop onto the stand fig b e f you plan to mount the AM antenna to a wall or other surface secure the stand with screws fig c before clipping the loop to the stand Make sure the reception is clear 4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception 5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket For best results extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame Don t drape loosely or leave coiled up m 9 X a For instructions on playing the multichannel analog inputs see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 50 If there is a single surround back output connect it to the SURR BACK L jack on this receiver e ousea5 1 channel speaker set use the surround speakers for the surround channel not the surround back channel The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Speaker system set ting on page 98 The audio signal input to MULTI CH IN cannot be downmixed e To input video signals using an HDMI cable MULTI CH IN must be selected at Input under Input Setup and the connected HDMI terminal must be assigned to HDMI Input Fo
219. nnecting a Pioneer player supporting the Sound Retriever Link function compressed audio files played on the player can be corrected automatically to play the sound with higher density This feature is only available when the connected Pioneer Blu ray Disc Player supporting the PQLS function Virtual Wide speaker When you re not using front wide speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front wide channel through your front speakers This improves the continuity of the sound from the front channel to the surround channels Stream Smoother Link By connecting a Pioneer player supporting the Stream Smoother Link function compressed video or movie files played on the player can be corrected automatically to play them with a more natural easily viewable picture This feature is only available when the connected Pioneer Blu ray Disc Player supporting the PQLS function iPod playback Your iPod iPhone or iPad can be connected to the receiver s USB terminal and RCA video terminal to play the music video files on the iPod iPhone or iPad Also the iPod iPhone or iPad is charged when it is connected to the receiver Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontally oriented sound field The height channel strengthens the sound field s sense of three dimensionality and air producing presence a
220. nnels ensure better surround sound integration for multichannel setting Press PHASE PHASE CONTROL to select FULLBAND PHASE Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control functions are switched on The FULL BAND and 2 indica tor on the front panel lights A Note e To calibrate and analyze the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers either follow the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC see Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 or set Auto MCACC menu under Auto MCACC under ADVANCED MCACC to Full Band Phase Ctrl Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC with Auto MCACC menu Upon calibra tion of the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers the Full Band Phase Ctrl feature is automatically switched on The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the GUI screen see Checking MCACC Data on page 95 Also by transferring the measurement data to the computer using the CD ROM AVNavigator the original characteris tics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 39 dimension on your PC For details refer to the operating instructions for the Advanced MCACC PC Display Application Software included on the CD ROM AVNavigator Depending on the input signal and listening mode it may not be possible to
221. not be registered on this receiver s remote con trol Operate the device using another remote control If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support HDCP ERROR shows in the display Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP If it is not compatible with HDCP reconnect the source device using a different type of connection component or composite Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause HDMI this message to be displayed but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is nota malfunction Symptom Remedy Synchronized operation not possible Check the HDMI connections a indicator blinks continu Check all the points below using Control with HDMI function The cable may be damaged ously i l ae Select ON for the Control Mode with HDMI setting see HDMI Setup on page 70 No picture or sound This receiver is HDCP compatible Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP compatible If they are not please connect them using the component or Turn the TV s power on before turning on this receiver s power composite video jacks Set the TV side Control with HDMI setting to on see TV s operating instructions Depending on the connected source component it s possible that it will not work with Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT
222. nslate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur On this product when the THX indicator is on THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes e g THX Cinema THX Surround EX Re Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equip ment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment Re Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment Timbre Matching The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming In a movie theatre there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you In a home theatre you use only two speakers located to the side of your head The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers Adaptive Decorrelation In a movie theatre a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers This can make the surround speakers sound like head phones that lack
223. nt ti patito orb rediret able tuna 90 SPECHTICALIONS SS 126 Zuffo ratio MACC a cole gerne ter ret vin dcdimtib qid oti Mtn S teb bU ee 90 Preset code iSt 128 Manual SN NS SetU TTA 92 Nice Eb WM p c Tr THEME 95 BEMANI c cT II T o memo 96 12 The System Setup and Other Setup menus Making receiver settings from the System Setup Then sicot ic lier rueda vote deo Hos pose eta ee REP hepar ecd dta Ple eicodz 98 Mantal pedro SetiD to a ana mM tae crater bu ONE RIED Ir M EDEN IU Eu CoL A 98 Si 0 dees SUID THIS Meant een Rater E PR QUEN IRE PAPER RIEN ee tite On tira nn DIN OU REA tr eee eee ote ter ner PIE EDI 100 Checking the Network e dI eio PN ment Cen Renner ert tr ea ett eet ent en nen erence Dm 101 iren uH cT Tm vege pt teat neces E A nent nanecdea co artes Soueaa 102 PU Me StD aaa EL T E S 0 EO MUR 104 13 FAQ ligee creuit t blotter Sich dee econ TL ULTMUUTUPUUPTT 106 Ro T T n 106 NOSOUNO MNT seen ea casa hatte la nein te uit ceo cadaver feud zu eda nd 9 coed 106 ime ecu a eis 199 MISERE OSEE 107 ADAPTER PORT terminal si arrieiro aa RU tendat OE Mu cd M EDU D metus rue 108 MOCO m ced deuacasth 108 TV sa rtp coi eU 108 Professional Calibration EQ graphical OUTPUT a echt EL ned satum GR ctt ntfi tdi en tires erent 109 Ee e T m Ts 109 REMOTE CONTOS ET E UTE RS 109 HOMI PO
224. nto your outlet consult an ee SDUSLN 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus NOTE electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 12 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped D3 7 13 69_En This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communica
225. ntrol The LED flashes once then stops flashing remaining lit Controlling the rest of your system e The remote controls should be 3 cm 1 inch apart k 002000 BE figei UL O 3em 0 0000C 1 inch Other remote control This receiver s remote control 4 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending teaching the signal to this receiver s remote control If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash the setting has been successfully completed e fthe LED flashes for five seconds it means the memory is full See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 85 to erase a programmed button you re not using to free up more memory note that some signals may take more memory than others e Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal e Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart 5 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4 To program signals for another component exit and repeat steps 2 through 4 6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode Erasing one of the remote control button settings This erases one of the buttons y
226. nts support the Control with HDMI feature the convenient Control with HDMI x v Color signal transfer functions can be used see Control with HDMI function on page 69 e ARC Audio Return Channel e 4K signal transfer This may not operate properly depending on the connected equipment 4K 24p 4K 25p and 4K 30p signals are supported Not supported for the HDMI IN 6 and IN 7 terminals e Input of multi channel linear PCM digital audio signals 192 kHz or less for up to 8 channels e Input of the following digital audio formats Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus DIS High bitrate audio Dolby TrueHD DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD High Resolution Audio DVD Audio CD SACD DSD signal Video CD Super VCD e Synchronized operation with components using the Control with HDMI function see Control with HDMI func tion on page 69 2 Note e An HDMI connection can only be made with DVl equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP If you choose to connect to a DVI connector you will need a separate adaptor DVI HDMI to do so A DVI connection however does not support audio signals Consult your local audio dealer for more information e f you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be dis played but so long as there is no
227. nvenient for using the remote control unit for devices not connected to the receiver See Direct function on page 85 Setting Preset recall Code learning Direct function This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned Codes learned for the different input functions can be erased individually See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 84 The backlight lighting pattern can be selected from among four modes in consideration of convenience and battery service life See Setting the backlight mode on page 85 This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set Key resetting can be done for individual input functions See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 85 Erase learning Back light Reset function This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon ship AM veget ment from the factory See Resetting the remote control settings on page 86 If you have multiple Pioneer receivers amplifiers etc this setting can be used to prevent other units from Change RC l A i l l Hane operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated See Operating multiple receivers on page 83 D Note e You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing RCU SETUP e After one minute of inactivity the remote automatically exits the operation
228. o MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select e Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup the headphones should be disconnected e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT terminal and the TV s HDMI input are con nected with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings N CAUTION e The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume THX e THX is a trademark of THX Ltd which is registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved 1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver 2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel MCACC SETUP MIC Mi h icrophone Pere NC Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone If you have a tripod use it to place the microphone so that it s about ear level at your normal listening position If you do not have a tripod use some other object to install the microphone Install the microphone on a stable floor Placing the microphone on any of the following surfaces may make accurate measurement impossible e Sofas or other soft surfaces e High places such as tabletops and sofa tops The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connect
229. o access e STATUS Press to check selected receiver settings page 80 e AUTO ALC DIRECT Switches between Auto Surround page 58 Auto Level Control Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode page 60 e STANDARD Press for Standard decoding and to switch various modes OO Pro Logic Neo X etc page 58 e ADV SURR Use to switch between the various surround modes page 59 e THX Press to select a Home THX listening mode page 59 SIGNAL SEL Use to select an input signal page 60 e MCACC Press to switch between MCACC presets page 60 e CH LEVEL Press repeatedly to select a channel then use to adjust the level page 99 AUTO S RTRV Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio sources page 4 e SPEAKERS Use to change the speaker terminal page 78 DIMMER Dims or brightens the display page 80 e SLEEP Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep page 80 e HDMI OUT Switch the HDMI output terminal page 80 6 TV CONTROL buttons These buttons can be used to perform operations on the TV to which the TV CONTROL INPUT button is assigned The TV can be operated with these buttons regardless of the input set for the remote control s operation mode page 83 7 Receiver setting buttons Press RECEIVER first to access AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio options page 4 e VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video options page 76 e HOME MENU
230. o level control ALC mode this receiver equalizes playback sound levels Also the low and high frequency sounds dialogs surround effects etc that are difficult to hear when the vol ume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night Front Stage Surround Advance With the Front Stage Surround Advance feature you can enjoy seamless natural surround sound effects using only the front speakers without deteriorating the quality of the original sound MCACC The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup which includes the advanced fea tures of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ Control with HDMI function Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI compatible Pioneer TV or Blu ray Disc player are pos sible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable e The receiver s volume can be set and the sound can be muted using the TV s remote control e The receiver s input switches over automatically when the TV s input is changed or a Control with HDMI compatible component is played e The receiver s power is also set to standby when the TV s power is set to standby ARC Audio Return Channel Whena IV supporting the HDMI ARC Audio Return Channel function is connected to the receiver the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal The sound of the TV can be input from the receiver s HDMI OUT term
231. ol to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input Press TOP MENU to select Bluetooth Setup Use 1 4 to select Air Jam then press ENTER Use 1 4 to select Air Jam ON then press ENTER Press the RETURN button twice to exit Bluetooth Setup For more details of using Air Jam access to our website http pioneer jp product sott iapp_airjam en html ui A W N Listening to your system Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes 58 fuepueiaean loce 60 Choosing Boa Miaje ud To o er nanna 60 Better sound using Phase CODTEOluuueenesciuasixx ac veuiaruck vtm are ER IE Ed CREo cu vwS2r C Ui pO D URS M E Cu su v vC Sav CER 61 Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control 61 Listening to your system Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes Using this receiver you can listen to any source in Surround sound However the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you re listening to To play with surround sound check Standard surround sound Using the Home THX modes or Using the Advanced surround effects below and select the desired mode To play with the optimum mode for the input signal see Auto playback or Using Stream Direct The sound is played in stereo when 2 channe
232. on If you selected 7 1ch Front Bi Amp 7 1ch ZONE 2 5 1ch Bi Amp ZONE 2 5 1ch ZONE 2 3 5 1ch F Surr Bi Amp or 5 1ch F C Bi Amp the button will simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode 2 Use SPEAKERS to select a speaker system setting As mentioned above if you have selected 7 1ch Front Bi Amp 7 1ch ZONE 2 5 1ch Bi Amp ZONE 2 5 1ch ZONE 2 3 5 1ch F Surr Bi Amp or 5 1ch F C Bi Amp the button will simply switch your main speaker terminal A on or off Pre AMP mode The pre amp mode is a mode for reducing power consumption when power amplifiers are connected to the receiver s PRE OUT terminals by individually turning off the power of the amplifiers for those channels Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option When you select 9 1ch FH FW you can select from e SP FH FW ON Front height or front wide channels are added to the front center surround and surround back channels maximum 7 channels and a maximum of 9 channels are output The front height and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal e SP FH ON Front height channels are added to the front center surround and surround back channels maximum 7 channels and a maximum of 9 channels are output e SP FW ON Front wide channels are added to the front center surround and surround back channels maximum 7 channels and a maximum of 9 channels
233. onnected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected 2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 3 Select System Setup from the Home Menu 4 Select OSD Language from the System Setup menu 5 Select the desired language 6 Select OK to change the language The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area taking into account ambient noise speaker connection and speaker size and tests for both channel delay and channel level After you have set up the microphone provided with your system the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room By performing the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure the frequency phase characteristics of the connected speakers are also calibrated Once the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed the Full Band Phase Control function is automatically turned on page 61 amp Important e Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup e Using the Full Aut
234. ons A CAUTION Make sure that all speakers are securely installed This not only improves sound quality but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes 1 Twist exposed wire strands together 2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire 3 Tighten terminal 1 10 mm Csin lal 7 Note Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers e Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer It is not possible to connect using speaker cables e f you have two subwoofers the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction In this case the same sound is output from the two subwoofers Connecting your equipment Banana plug connections Bi wiring your speakers If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana plugs screw the speaker terminal fully shut then plug Your speakers can also be bi wired if they support bi amping the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal e With these connections the Speaker System setting makes no difference A CAUTION e Don t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way e When bi wiring as well heed the cautions for bi amping shown above To bi wire a speaker conn
235. oofer set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL see Speaker Setting on page 99 The speakers may be out of phase Check that the positive negative speaker terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers see Connect ing the speakers on page 22 If applicable check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off or the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting If there is a PHASE setting on your sub woofer set it to 0 or depending on the subwoofer the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound Everything seems to be set up cor rectly but the playback sound is odd The Phase Control feature doesn t seem to have an audible effect Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers see Speaker Distance on page 99 Perform Full Auto MCACC measurements see Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 Full Band Phase Control automatically turns on once measurements are completed Full Band Phase Control cannot be selected Noise or hum can be heard even when there is no sound being input Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not causing interference Can t select some Input functions by Check the Input Skip settings in the Input Setup menu see he Input Setup menu on the INPUT SELECTOR
236. or a TV program on the TV e When in the synchronized amp mode the synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces sound from the TV is performed from the TV s menu screen etc e When the TV s power is set to standby the receiver s power is also set to standby Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV e The receiver s input switches automatically when the Control with HDMI compatible component is played e The receiver s input switches automatically when the TV s input is switched e he synchronized amp mode remains in effect even if the receiver s input is switched to a component other than one connected by HDMI The operations below can also be used on Pioneer Control with HDMI compatible TVs e When the receiver s volume is adjusted or the sound is muted the volume status is displayed on the TV s screen e When the OSD language is switched on the TV the receiver s language setting also switches accordingly Control with HDMI function Setting the PQLS function PQLS Precision Quartz Lock System is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the Control with HDMI function It offers higher quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible player etc This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is generated upon transmission e On playe
237. or classes A to G of 9 stations each 1 Tune to a station you want to memorize oee Listening to the radio on page 54 for more on this 2 Press TOOLS TUNER EDIT The display shows PRESET MEMORY then a blinking memory class 3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes then press PRESET to select the station preset you want You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset 4 Press ENTER After pressing ENTER the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station Listening to station presets 1 Press TUNER to select the tuner 2 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G 3 Press PRESET to select the station preset you want e You can also use the number buttons on the remote control to recall the station preset Naming station presets For easier identification you can name your station presets 1 Choose the station preset you want to name See Listening to station presets on page 55 for how to do this 2 Press TOOLS TUNER EDIT The display shows PRESET NAME then a blinking cursor at the first character position 3 Input the name you want Use TUNE or TUNE f 4 of front panel to select a character PRESET or PRESET of front panel to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection A Note e To erase a station name simply repeat steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces
238. or details regarding these THX features ULTRA2 for the SC 68 SELECT2 for the SC 67 1 Select THX Audio Setting from the Manual SP Setup menu 2 Select either ON or OFF for the THX Loudness Plus setting 3 Specify whether the SBch Processing is AUTO or MANUAL e AUTO When surround back speakers are connected Dolby Digital EX signal is present in the audio signals being input is detected and the appropriate THX surround mode is set e MANUAL The desired THX surround mode can be selected regardless of whether or not surround back channel signals are present in the audio signals being input 4 Specify whether your subwoofer is Ultra2 Select2 certified or not If your subwoofer isn t THX Ultra2 Select certified but you still want to switch boundary gain compensation on select YES here but the effect might not work properly 5 Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain Compensation setting 6 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu The System Setup and Other Setup menus Network Setup menu Make the settings for connecting the receiver to the Internet and using the network functions 1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to exit the current menu 2 Select System Setup from the Home Menu 3 Select Netw
239. or music CD player can damage speakers or cause impaired hearing due to the large volume License e Please agree to the Terms of Use indicated below before using this CD ROM Do not use if you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its use Terms of Use e Copyright to data provided on this CD ROM belongs to PIONEER CORPORATION Unauthorized transfer duplication broadcast public transmission translation sales lending or other such matters that go beyond the scope of personal use or citation as defined by Copyright Law may be subject to punitive actions Permission to use this CD ROM is granted under license by PIONEER CORPORATION General Disclaimer e PIONEER CORPORATION does not guarantee the operation of this CD ROM with respect to personal com puters using any of the applicable OS In addition PIONEER CORPORATION is not liable for any damages incurred as a result of use of this CD ROM and is not responsible for any compensation The names of private corporations products and other entities described herein are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective firms Using AVNavigator 1 Click AVNavigator 2012 IV on the desktop to launch AVNavigator AV Navigator is launched and Wiring Navi starts up The language selection screen appears Follow the instruc tions on the screen to make the connections and automatic settings Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the first time AVNavigator is launched 2 S
240. or the other components you want to control To try out the remote control switch the component on or off into standby by pressing SOURCE If it doesn t seem to work select the next code from the list if there is one 5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset setup mode Programming signals from other remote controls If the preset code for your component is not available or the available preset codes do not operate correctly you can program signals from the remote control of another component This can also be used to program additional operations buttons not covered in the presets after assigning a preset code The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls The buttons available are shown below SOURCE GS GS C22 ES Favorite EB E3 EB E32 CLASS 72 EB CZ 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 2 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash o learn codes at the TV CONTROL buttons proceed to step 3 e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control The LED blinks once and flashes continuously 3 Point the two remote controls towards each other then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver s remote co
241. or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn t work try switch eee ing V CONV in Setting the Video options on page 76 to OFF Depending on a number of factors bass reproduction capabilities of the speakers room size speaker placement etc this may occur in some cases Change the speaker setting Can t record video Checkthatthesourceisnotcopyprotected o manually in Speaker Setting on page 99 and use the ALL Keep SP System option for The video converter is not available when making recordings Check that the same type the Auto MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC Expert on page 90 if this is a recurring of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source the one you problem LLL Wwantierecord tothisreceiver ooo Can t adjust the Fine Speaker Dis Check that the speakers are all in phase make sure the positive and negative Noisy intermittent or distorted Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal during scanning for example tance setting properly terminals are matched up properly picture or the video quality may just be poor with some video game units for example The picture quality may also depend on the settings etc of your display device Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection component or composite then start playback again Symptom SC 68 only Gauge value does not increas
242. ork Setup from the System Setup menu 4 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order e IP Address Proxy Sets up the IP address Proxy of this receiver page 100 Network Standby Allows the AVNavigator function to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode page 101 Friendly Name The name of the receiver displayed on a computer or other device connected to the network can be changed page 101 Parental Lock Restricts usage of network functions page 101 Port Number Setting Sets the numbers of the ports where signals from IP Control are received page 101 IP address Proxy setting In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router with a built in DHCP server function simply turn on the DHCP server function and you will not need to set up the network manually You must set up the network as described below only when you have connected this receiver to a broadband router without a DHCP server function Before you set up the network consult with your ISP or the network man ager for the required settings It is advised that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component e n case you make changes to the network configuration without the DHCP server function make the corre sponding changes to the network settings of this receiver IP Address The IP address
243. oss in quality For more details about FLAC visit the following website http tTlac sourceforge net Windows Media Windows Media is a multimedia framework for media creation and distribution for Microsoft Windows Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries Use an application licensed by Microsoft Corporation to author distribute or play Windows Media formatted content Using an application unauthorized by Microsoft Corporation is subject to malfunction Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Player 12 Windows Media Player is software to deliver music photos and movies from a Microsoft Windows computer to home stereo systems and IVs With this software you can play back files stored on the PC through various devices wherever you like in your home This software can be downloaded from Microsoft s website e Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP or Windows Vista e Windows Media Player 12 for Windows 7 For more information check the official Microsoft website Windows Media DRM Windows Media DRM is a DRM Digital Rights Management service for the Windows Media platform It is designed to provide secure delivery of audio and or video content over an IP network to a PC or other playback device in such a way that the distributor can control how that content is used The WMDRM protected content can only be played back on a component supporting the WMDRM service
244. ou have programmed and restores the button to the factory default 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 7 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e To erase operations registered at the TV CONTROL buttons proceed to step 3 e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased The LED flashes once 3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds If the LED lights for one second the erasing has been successfully completed 4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons 5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing mode Controlling the rest of your system Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input func tion and restores the factory default This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 9 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for three seconds To erase the operations registered at all the TV CONTROL buttons press the TV CONTROL INPUT button for 3 seconds If the LED lights for one second the erasing has bee
245. peakers making it sound wider higher settings or narrower lower settings Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back making the sound more distant minus settings or more forward positive settings Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect Adjusts the center gain to create a wider stereo effect with vocals Adjust the effect from 0 all center channel sent to front right and left speakers to 1 0 center channel sent to the center speaker only Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround or ALC mode each mode can be set separately Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when listening in OO Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT mode If set to HIGH the sound from the top will be more emphasized When you re not using surround back speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your sur round speakers You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information Option s OFF 20dB 15dB 10dB 5dB 0dB Default OdB OFF ON OdB 6dB AMP THROUGH OFF ON lt 40to7 gt Default 3 lt 3 to 3 gt Default 0 OFF ON lt 0 to 1 0 gt Defaults Neo X CINEMA 1 0 Neo X MUSIC 0 3 Neo X GAME 1 0 lt 10 to 90 gt Defaults EXT STEREO 90 Others 50 LOW MID HIGH OFF ON Setting What
246. pped with a great number of functions and settings The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings MHL MHL Mobile High definition Link is an interface standard for transmitting digital signals with mobile devices MHL can carry high quality multi channel audio data and full HD video formats This receiver incorporates MHL 1 USB DAC By using a USB cable Type A Male to Type B Male sold separately to connect this unit s USB DAC IN terminal to the USB port on a PC this unit can be used as a D A converter Additional information Additional information Playback High Resolution audio file Features index See About playable file formats on page 68 i Operation Mode See Playing a USB device on page 52 See Operation Mode Setup on page 48 Slideshow A Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device on pag l AVNavigator See Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device on page 52 See About using AVNavigator included CD ROM on page 10 Bluetooth ADAPTER Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music on page 55 Full Auto MCACC See ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music on page 55 See Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 ARC Audio Return Channel Automatic MCACC Expert See HPM Setu on page 70 See Automatic MCACC Expert on page 90 SACD Gain 1 Manual MCACC setup See Setting the Audio
247. ppens Go device cannot be connected or oper oven wireless LAN device or B uetooth wireless technology apparatus is near the unit If DE Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal ated Sound from the B uetooth wire such an object is near the unit set the unit far from it Or stop using the object emitting less technology device is not emitted the electromagnetic waves Change the VIDEO PARAMETER menu RES setting see Setting the Video options on page 7 6 orthe sound is interrupted Check that the B uetooth wireless technology device is not too far from the unit and that Video signals from the HDMI terminal cannot be output to the component terminals obstructions are not set between the B uetooth wireless technology device and the unit Input the video signals from the player or other source to the composite or component Set the B uetooth wireless technology device and the unit so that the distance between terminals When using the component terminal assign it at Input Setup see The Input them is less than about 10 m 33 ft and no obstructions exist between them Setup menu on page 47 Check that the B uetooth ADAPTER and the ADAPTER PORT of the unit are correctly The picture s movement is unnatural When Resolution under VIDEO PARAMETER is set to 1080 24p the picture may not be connected displayed properly for some source materials In this case set the resolution to some The Bluetooth
248. prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Windows 7 Compatible with Windows 7 Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies MHL KMAL MHL the MHL Logo and Mobile High Definition Link are trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the United States and other countries Additional information Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats depending on the Stream Direct mode see Using Stream Direct on page 60 you have selected Stereo 2 channel signal formats Auto Surround ALC Input signal format DIRECT PURE DIRECT Surround Back
249. problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction emn D e Depending on the component you have connected using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal d 4 JL le transfers e This receiver supports SACD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD and DTS HD Master Audio To take advantage of these formats however make sure that the component connected to this receiver also Supports the corre sponding format e Use a High Speed HDMI cable If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI cable is used it may not work properly e When an HDMI cable with a built in equalizer is connected it may not operate properly e Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component e HDMI format digital audio transmissions require a longer time to be recognized Due to this interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback e Turning on off the device connected to this unit s HDMI OUT terminal during playback or disconnecting con necting the HDMI cable during playback may cause noise or interrupted audio e When connecting to an HDMI DVI compatible monitor using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL See Switching the HDMI output on page 80 e For input components connections other than HDMI connections are also possible see Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 31 This connection is required in
250. quency Quantization bitrate Channel 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 16 bit 2 ch 8 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz 192 kHz 16 bit 24 bit 20 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 16 bit 2 ch 5 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 16 bit 2 ch 16 kbps to 320 kbps Supported Supported 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz 192 kHz 16 bit 24 bit 2 ch a MPEG Layer 3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported specifi cally Pro Lossless Voice c Uncompressed FLAC files are not supported Pioneer does not guarantee playback Playback with NETWORK features Control with HDMI function About the Control with HDMI fun CtiON 0 ina in niin niin 70 Making Control with HDMI connections ceeseseseeseeeeeeee ener enhn nhan nnn nnn nhan nnn n ana na ranas 70 MOMI SEUD c 70 Before using synchrohlzdElOEL secessum ecvbeds viia cvcan Food rddo rcv dkarws is vel vi RA EVER EVI NE FETU 71 About synchronized operations 0 cj i niin nnn nnn niin niin 71 Setting the POLS UNC Gl OI sca ace cee eet ae acs eae os ec a cee eee cadence tence asec 71 About Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link
251. r 2 1 When this unit and another device equipped with B uetooth wireless technology both comply with B uetooth Specification Ver 2 1 pairing of the two may be possible without the need for inputting a password In this case a passcode may be displayed on this receiver and on the device equipped with B uetooth wire less technology If this happens check that the same passcode is displayed on this receiver and the device equipped with B uetooth wireless technology then press ENTER After this also perform the connection operation on the B uetooth device to be connected If the passcode does not match the code displayed on the bluetooth device to be connected press RETURN to cancel pairing then try starting over Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input then conduct the pairing operation on the B uetooth wireless technology device If pairing is successful there is no need to performing the pairing operation below e Pairone unit at a time e When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth connections with a device equipped with the B uetooth function to listen to music do not connect any devices other than this receiver by B uetooth connection to the B uetooth equipped device If a B uetooth connection is already established with a device other than this receiver discon nect the other device before connecting this receiver Press ADPT on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input Press TOP MENU to select Bluetooth Setup
252. r before calibration e EQ ON You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this receiver after calibration Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments neces sary for your listening area The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected To use another MCACC preset press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store After auto calibration with EQ Type SYMMETRY Full Auto MCACC etc the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration measure with EQ ON When the reverb measurement is finished you can select Reverb View to see the results on screen See Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 109 for troubleshooting information 4 Ifyou selected Reverb View you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel Press RETURN when you re done The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted Use m w to select the channel frequency and calibration setting you want to check Use ft 4 to go back and forth between the three The reverb characteristics graph before and after EQ calibration can be displayed by selecting Calibration Before After Note that the markers on the vertical a
253. r details see he Input Setup menu on page 47 e To input video signals using a composite video cable Multi Ch In Setup must be selected at Other Setup and the connected video input terminal must be assigned to Video Input For details see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 104 Connecting external antennas To improve FM reception connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 Q To improve AM reception connect a 5 m to 6 m 16 ft to 20 ft length of vinyl coated wire to the AM LOOP termi 15 Q coaxial WO N AM LOOP FM UNBAL 75 Q ANTENNA nals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna For the best possible reception suspend horizontally outdoors Indoor antenna vinyl coated wire Outdoor antenna FT d 5mto6m 16 ft to 20 ft Connecting your equipment MULTI ZONE setup This receiver can power up to four independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI ZONE connections Ditferent sources can be playing in four zones at the same time or depending on your needs the same source can also be used The main and sub zones have independent power the main zone power can be off while one or both of the sub zones is on and the sub zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls Making MULTI ZONE connections It is possible to make these connections if you have a separate TV subwoofer and speakers for your primary sub zone ZONE 2 an
254. re is switched on page 58 e ALC Lights when the ALC Auto level control mode is selected page 58 e STREAM DIRECT Lights when Direct Pure Direct is selected page 60 e ADV SURROUND Lights when one of the Advanced Surround modes has been selected page 59 e STANDARD Lights when one of the Standard Surround modes is switched on page 58 e THX Lights when one of the Home THX modes is selected page 59 Controls and displays 7 P PHASE CONTROL Lights when the Phase Control page 61 or Full Band Phase Control page 61 is switched on 8 Analog signal indicators Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal page 74 9 PQLS Lights when the PQLS feature is active page 71 10 Tuner indicators e TUNED Lights when a broadcast is being received e STEREO Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode e MONO Lights when the mono mode is set using MPX 11 UX Lights when the sound is muted 12 SOUND Lights when the DIALOG E Dialog Enhancement or TONE tone controls features is selected page 4 13 Master volume level Shows the overall volume level indicates the minimum level and 12dB indicates the maximum level 14 Input function indicators Light to indicate the input function you have selected 15 Scroll indicators Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings 16 Speaker indicators Lights to indicate the current speak
255. receiver is in the standby mode This lets you reduce power consumption in the standby mode Friendly Name 1 Select Friendly Name from the Network Setup menu 2 Select Edit Name then select Rename If after changing the name you want to restore the name to the default select Default 3 Input the name you want Use f to select a character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection The System Setup and Other Setup menus Parental Lock Set restrictions for using Internet services Also set the password accompanying the usage restrictions e Upon shipment from the factory the password is set to 0000 amp Important When the INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM PANDORA or FAVORITES input is selected the setting made here can not be reflected 1 Select Parental Lock from the Network Setup menu 2 Input the password Use to select a character to set the position and ENTER to confirm your selection 3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock on or off e OFF Internet services are not restricted e ON Internet services are restricted 4 Ifyou want to change the password select Change Password In this case the procedure returns to step 2 Port Number Setting On this receiver there can be up to 5 numbers of ports where signals are received One of these port 8102 cannot be changed but the desired number can be set for the 4 other ports 1 Select Port Number S
256. receiver s DC OUTPUT for WIRELESS LAN terminal is properly connected WLAN POW ERR is displayed on the receiver s display window e here is a problem with the wireless LAN converter s power supply Turn the receiver s power off then disconnect the USB cable reconnect the USB cable and turn the receiver s power back on e f WLAN POW ERR is still displayed after repeating the above procedure several times there is a problem with the receiver or the USB cable Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized inde pendent service company The LAN cable is not firmly connected e Firmly connect the LAN cable page 42 Wireless LAN converter and base unit wireless LAN router etc are too far apart or there is an obstacle between them e Improve the wireless LAN environment by moving the wireless LAN converter and base unit closer together etc There is a microwave oven or other device generating electromagnetic waves near the wireless LAN environment e Use the system in a place away from microwave ovens or others device generating electromagnetic waves e Avoid using devices generating electromagnetic waves as much as possible when using the system with the wireless LAN Multiple wireless LAN converters are connected to the wireless LAN router e When connecting multiple wireless LAN converters their IP addresses must be changed Wireless LAN connections cannot be established between the wireless LAN converter an
257. rent status mode of the receiver certain options may not be able to be selected Check the ita Nelson aero table below for notes on this is acquired using the Control with HDMI function and the sound is optimized based on this information Sound Retriever Link May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source for example video OFF tape with lots of background noise when switched on This only has an effect with 2 channel signal inputs This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less DIALOG E Localizes dialog in the center channe to make it stand out from other 4 OFF FLAT UP1 UP2 Dialog Eahancemen background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack By moving from UP1 UPS UP4 gt through UP2 and UPS up to UP4 you can make the sound source lt c gt Default OFF seem to relocate upwards 3 Use to set as necessary See the table below for the options available for each setting 4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs DVDsor ON BDs 16 20 and 24 bit PCM as well as compressed audio is requan Audio parameter menu Hi bit32 tized to 32 bits and the high frequency component is interpolated Setting What it does Option s upon data processing to enable smoother more subtle musical OFF 4 M1 MEMORY 1 to expression Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset Hipp memories are saved When an MCA
258. rigger setting to switch it on automatically along with the main or sub zone specified Devices connected to 12 volt triggers can be associated with HDMI OUT switching For details see HOMI Setup on page 70 7 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the System Setup menu Input function default and possible settings The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions If you have con nected components to this receiver differently from or in addition to the defaults below see Ihe Input Setup menu on page 47 to tell the receiver how you ve connected up The dots indicate possible assignments Input function BD DVD SAT CBL DVR BDR VIDEO HDMI 5 MHL front panel HDMI 6 HDMI 7 INTERNET RADIO SiriusXM PANDORA MEDIA SERVER FAVORITES iPod USB USB DAC lt a gt TV CD TUNER PHONO MULTI CH IN lt a gt ADAPTER PORT a SC 68 only IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 Input Terminals COAX 1 COAX 2 OPT 2 OPT 1 lt b gt ANALOG 1 lt c gt Component IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 b When ARC at HDMI Setup is set to ON it is not possible to make assignments to the TV input s Audio In terminals c Onlythe TV and CD inputs can be assigned to ANALOG 1 Basic Setup Operation Mode Setup This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master
259. ront height e WIDE SURROUND MOVIE Up to 7 1 channel sound front wide especially suited to movie sources e WIDE SURROUND MUSIC Up to 7 1 channel sound front wide especially suited to music sources e Neo X CINEMA Up to 9 1 channel sound surround back and front height or surround back and front wide especially suited to movie sources e Neo X MUSIC Up to 9 1 channel sound surround back and front height or surround back and front wide especially suited to music sources e Neo X GAME Up to 9 1 channel sound surround back and front height or surround back and front wide especially suited to video games e STEREO he audio is heard with your sound settings and you can still use the audio options With multichannel sources If you have connected surround back front height or front wide speakers you can select according to format e OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE See above e DO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC See above e Dolby Digital EX Creates surround back channel sound for 5 1 channel sources and provides pure decod ing for 6 1 channel sources like Dolby Digital Surround EX D0 Pro Logic Iliz HEIGHT See above e WIDE SURROUND MOVIE See above e WIDE SURROUND MUSIC See above e Neo X CINEMA See above e Neo X MUSIC See above e Neo X GAME See above e DTS ES Matrix or DTS ES Discrete Allows you to hear 6 1 channel playback with DTS ES encoded sources e STEREO See above e Straight Decode Plays back without the effects a
260. rovides surround sound for both mono and stereo TV sources ADVANCED GAME Suitable for video games SPORTS Suitable for sports programs CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall type sound ROCK POP Creates a live concert sound for rock and or pop music e UNPLUGGED Suitable for acoustic music sources EXT STEREO Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source using all of your speakers e F S SURR FOCUS Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges e F S SURR WIDE Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode FOCUS position WIDE position Recommended Front left speaker Front left speaker Front right speaker Front right speaker e SOUND RETRIEVER AIR Suitable for listening to the sound from a Bluetooth wireless technology device The SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only be selected when the ADAPTER PORT input e PHONES SURR When listening through headphones you can still get the effect of overall surround 2 Note e When an Advanced Surround listening mode is selected the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 74 However with F S SURR FOCUS F S SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR the effect level cannot be adjusted e The Front Stage Surround Advance F S SURR FOCUS and F S SURR WIDE function allows you to create natu ral surround so
261. rs compatible with PQLS Bit stream PQLS always works for all sources e On players compatible with PQLS Multi Surround PQLS works for all sources Set the player s audio output to Linear PCM e On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio PQLS only works when playing CDs Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information This function is activated when Control is set to ON TA e The PQLS setting is set at PQLS in HDMI Setup on the HOME MENU but the setting can also be switched with the remote control as described below Press PQLS to select the PQLS setting The setting is displayed on the front panel display e PQLS AUTO PQLS is enabled A precision quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors jitter giving you the best possible digital to analog conversion when you use the HDMI inter face This is valid as an HDMI function for POLS compatible players e PQLS OFF PQLS is disabled About Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link These are automatic functions allowing you to output optimum audio and video signals from the receiver using the Control with HDMI function When a player supporting the respective function is connected to the receiver by HDMI the sound picture is optimized for the compressed audio video file played on the player e Depending on the compressed audio video file format it may not be operated automatically Also see
262. ry out any operations during this process The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF you can skip this process For details about the Control with HDMI feature see Contro with HDMI function on page 69 Basic Setup Changing the OSD display language OSD Languagge 45 Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACOC 45 Thenput Setup TUB liu eie iube seien bndi POM eet 47 Operation Mode Setup m E ree 48 About the Home Menu uoi tei eerie ree cnin nee teepestedenen sececeatecseeeesagieeevtscndeneetorececeseeead 48 Basic Setup Changing the OSD display language OSD Language The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be changed e The explanations in these operating instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen e The OSD display is only displayed when the receiver s HDMI OUT terminal and the TV s HDMI input are con nected with an HDMI cable If the TV is connected with anything other than an HDMI cable watch the front panel display while performing the various operations and making settings 1 Press RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this receiver for example if you c
263. s AirPlay works with iPhone 4S iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPod touch 4th 3rd and 2nd generations iPad 2 iPad with iOS 4 2 or later and iTunes 10 1 Mac and PC or later To use AirPlay select your receiver on your iPod touch iPhone iPad or in iTunes 1 The receiver s input will switch automatically to AirPlay when AirPlay is in use 2 The following operations can be performed when in AirPlay mode e Adjustment of the receiver s volume from iPod touch iPhone iPad or iTunes e Pause resume next previous track and shuffle repeat from the remote control of the receiver e Display of the currently playing track information on the receiver s display including artist song and album name 1 For more information see the Apple website http www apple com K2 The receiver s power automatically turns on when Network Standby at Network Setup is set to ON A Note e A network environment is required to use AirPlay e The receiver s name that shows up in the AirPlay UI on iPod touch iPhone iPad and iTunes can be changed by Friendly Name from Network Setup e AirPlay provided on this receiver has been developed and tested based on the software versions for the iPod iPhone iPad and the software versions for iTunes that are indicated on the Pioneer website AirPlay may not be compatible with iPod iPhone iPad or iTunes software versions other than those indicated on the Pioneer website About the DHCP server function To pla
264. s low frequency limitations no measur The power turns off automatically and some indicator flashes or some indicator flashes and the power does not turn on See the Power section page 106 Remedy There are cases where the graph does not appear flat even when selecting ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup due to adjustments made to compensate for room character istics to achieve optimal sound Remote control Areas of the graph may appear identical before and after when there is little or no adjustment needed Symptom Remedy The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after mea surements Cannot be remote controlled Set the remote control unit s remote control mode so that it matches the setting on the main unit see Operating multiple receivers on page 83 Despite level adjustments being made the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in the reverb characteristics graph after EQ calibration However these adjustments are taken into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration Check whether the receiver s remote control mode is properly set see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 102 Try replacing the batteries in the remote control see Loading the batteries on page 9 Low frequencies used in bass management the subwoofer channel will not change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration or
265. s the Auto Power Down function may not work properly due to excessive noise or other reasons Volume Setup You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is turned on 1 Select Volume Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver s power is turned on e LAST default When the power is turned on the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last turned off e When the power is turned on the volume is set to minimum level e 80 0dB to 12 0dB Specify the volume to be set when the power is turned on in steps of 0 5 dB It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup see below 3 Select the Volume Limit setting you want Use this function to limit the maximum volume The volume cannot be increased above the level set here even by operating VOLUME button or the dial on the front panel e OFF default The maximum volume is not limited e 20 0dB 10 0dB 0 0dB The maximum volume is limited to the value set here 4 Select the Mute Level setting you want This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed FULL default No sound e 40 0dB 20 0dB The volume will be turned down to the level specified here 5 When you re finished press RETURN Yo
266. s Center Gain OO PL Illz Options Height Gain Listening Mode 2 ch multi ch All Inputs Listening Mode Headphones See also Setting the Audio options on page 74 for other default DSP settings MCACC MCACC Position Memory Channel Level M1 to M6 Speaker Distance M1 to M6 ATT of all channels filters SWch Wide Trim All channels bands EQ Wide Trim Standing Wave M1 to M6 EQ Data M1 to M6 Setting Default OFF FULL ON ON OFF 0 0 frame CH1 AUTO 0 dB 0 dB OFF OFF 90 50 3 0 OFF Neo X CINEMA 1 0 Neo X MUSIC 0 3 Neo X MUSIC 0 3 MID AUTO SURROUND STEREO M1 MEMORY 1 0 0 dB 10 00 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB Controlling the rest of your system About the Remote Setup WN ese ae es sates Seen ees nenene eee eee esse 83 Operating multiple FECCIVENS sisssseniecesccscsssacasciianchswacsasscewendeeuosvessassensavarnatedeasuecedorsesdacensseinsdenectsne 83 Setting the remote to control other components eeeeeeeeeeeeeee nenne nennen nennen nnn nnns 83 Selecting preset codes directly i ucuaccozeckvc ree aatkusues wc vac coc cc Ih aeos us asuuc us rcEU CUOI MN e DE Sa UU ewes 83 Programming signals from other remote controls eeeeeeeeeeeee eene e eene 84 Erasing one of the remote control button settings 1 eese eeeeeeeeeee nennen nnne 84 Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function
267. s and a TV to the Zone 4 receiver as shown on the illustration below Sub zone ZONE 4 Main zone m Secondary MULTI ZONE setup using speaker terminals ZONE 3 You must select 5 1ch ZONE 243 in Speaker system setting on page 98 to use this setup 1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front wide speaker terminals You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration 2 Connecta TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT jack on this receiver Sub zone ZONE 3 Main zone FRONT WipE 2 e Connecting your equipment Connecting to the network through LAN interface By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal you can listen to Internet radio stations To listen to Internet radio stations you must sign a contract with an ISP Internet Service Provider beforehand When connected in this way you can play audio files stored on the components on the local network including your computer t Internet LAN 10 100 to LAN port a aw u 3 2 1 wan J Router Y LAN cable sold separately to LAN port Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router with or without the built in DHCP server function with a straight LAN cable CAT 5 or higher Turn on the DHCP server function of your router In case your router does not have the
268. s bands Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers excluding the subwoofer It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material providing a flat equalization setting If you re not satisfied with the adjust ment provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 90 you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits your tastes 1 Select EQ Adjust from the Manual MCACC setup menu 2 Select the channel s you want and adjust to your liking Use f to select the channel Use m w to select the frequency and f to boost or cut the EQ When you re finished go back to the top of the screen and press to return to Ch then use to select the channel e The OVER indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort If this happens bring the level down until OVER disappears from the display 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu A Note e Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance If the speaker bal ance seems uneven you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature Use m w to select TRIM then use f 4 to raise or lower
269. s mode is meant for small environments rather than the large environments of theaters THX Surround EX A mode using technology developed jointly by Dolby Laboratories and THX for creating a sound field behind the listeners THX Loudness Plus A mode creating a rich subtle surround sound field through optimal calibration of the volume and frequency response of the individual channels according to the volume level Decoding A technology for converting digital signals that have been compressed upon recording by a digital signal process ing circuit etc into the original signals The term decoding or matrix decoding is also used for the technol ogy which converts 2 channel sound sources into multiple channels or expands 5 1 channel signals into 6 1 or 1 1 channels Calibrating the sound field Improving the sound quality Phase Control The Phase Control technology incorporated into this receiver s design provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position Full Band Phase Control The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers connected Full Band Phase Control FRONT ALIGN Full Band Phase Control calibrates frequency phase disturbances group delay for the full speaker band Full Band SYMMETRY but with this unit it is also possible to calibrate the frequency phase characteristics of other speakers to th
270. s not compatible no picture is output Also in some cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals In this case change the setting e When AUTO is selected the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV monitor connected by HDMI When PURE is selected the signals are output with the same resolution as when input see About the video converter on page 29 c This setting is valid for HDMI output P MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON e his setting have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format 480i 576i or 10801 signals d Adjustment is not possible unless V ADJ Advanced Video Adjust is set to MEMORY e This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input 480i 576i 480p 576p 720p 1080 analog video signals 480i 576i 480p 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080p24 HDMI video signals f This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks g elftheimage doesn t match your monitor type adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor his setting is only displayed when 480i p or 576i p video signals are being input Switching the speaker terminals If you selected 9 1ch FH FW 7 1ch Speaker B 7 1ch FH FW ZONE 2 or 5 1ch SP B Bi Amp at Speaker system setting on page 98 you can switch between speakers using the SPEAKERS butt
271. se as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter such as an HDMI switch can cause operational errors e When the receiver s Control is turned ON even if the receiver s power is in the standby mode it is possible to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the receiver but only when a Control with HDMI compatible component Blu ray Disc player etc and compatible TV are connected In this case the receiver s power turns on and the power and HDMI indicators light Using other functions Setting the Audio options access ce ce eee see cme teu ee ce geese See ece cc see eee eee eee ee emcee eet 74 Setting th Video OpLIOTIS wisi ssesscseseeceesectundiznssesescauastueuonvesusiversuvarvatsdeasuadeasanesdudeesccisbddaentssansuasetenses 76 Switching the speaker termlilials uoo cocco cccuu cu eee occu epe oec ccce s sien c ee Ee scc usu ep eU Ex Dea nGes c oS Ee eer edes 78 Using the MULTI ZONE OntFOIS iconic nis steve ccv oce ks uk su Sau des auwu xen rk ER deus Ew uS s Cw e VUE 79 Making an audio or a video recording ceeeeseeeeeee nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn nn nnn 79 Network settings from a web browser eeeeeeeeeeeeee esses eeen eene nennen nennen nnn nnns nn nnn nnns 80 Using the sleep IMEN cscs case oie ceus eo EHE set ca eon sre e Fue E co senem E EE Ee sept ones eee
272. se barEEEDeEIErEE PE TeEEEEDrRE 42 Connecung an IR FeCelV6E iieaccuaco cuoco etae sores Esa deca p nacE eus ku eu ata A Aaa Oaai 42 Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger 43 PIUGGING In the recevel ssuascucsckts cop durk xL uised adnd Eas EUEEE RUREJaM ERR EU UUUS EEANN UU ERR FIR NEN M C e E TE uan F EMLRE 43 Connecting your equipment SC 67 Connecting your equipment p BD IN INA IN INg This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities but it doesn t have to be difficult This chapter issue es ee ELM wa OO explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system sssaus e COMPONENT VDEO OPTICAL sssauaiz HO D bru S es OUTPUT 5V A CAUTION i Meme o z o pae Before making or changing the connections switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet Plugging in should be the final step e When making connections also keep the power cords of the devices being connected unplugged from the D OW e r O u ji et S ue beds m FRONT CENTER FRONT HEIGHT FRONTWIDE B SURROUND SURROUND BACK n e Depending on the device being connected amplifier receiver etc the methods of connection and terminal ga a c s names may differ from the explanations in this manual Also refer to the operating instructions of the respec m Important EXTENSION somAMAX T
273. select a speaker size Use to select the size and number of each of the following speakers e Front Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or if you didn t connect a subwoofer Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer e Center Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect a center speaker choose NO the center channel is sent to the front speakers e FH Select LARGE if your front height speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect front height speakers choose NO the front height channel is sent to the front speakers You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is 9 1ch FH FW 7 1ch Speaker B or 7 1ch FH FW ZONE 2 lfthe surround speakers are set to NO this setting will automatically be set to NO e FW Select LARGE if your front wide speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect front wide speakers choose NO the front wide channel is sent to the front speakers You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is 9 1ch FH FW or 7 1ch FH FW ZONE 2 fthe surround speakers are set to NO this se
274. set the Full Band Phase Ctrl mode to ON The Full Band Phase Ctrl mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases When headphones are plugged in When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page 14 Listening to your system Using the Full Band Phase Control s FRONT ALIGN function Full Band Phase Control calibrates frequency phase disturbances group delay for the full soeaker band Full Band SYMMETRY but with this unit it is also possible to calibrate the frequency phase characteristics of other speakers to the frequency phase characteristics of the front speakers FRONT ALIGN Full Band Phase Control calibration can be performed in the FRONT ALIGN mode by making the settings and performing the operations below 1 Perform Full Band Phase Control measurements with the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC procedure 2 Perform measurements with EQ Type set to FRONT ALIGN with the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC procedure 3 Press the MCACC button to select the MCACC memory at which the measurements performed with EQ Type set to FRONT ALIGN are stored 4 Turn Full Band Phase Control on Playback with NETWORK features BEV GROG CI OU sete cate EAS A EEE AN EEA AENA A 64 Playback with Network fUNCtiONS cccccecsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensnseessesnaneneeeeseseseeeeesasanenesssssaneneneesees 65
275. settop DOX tuit reete teer ert 34 HDMI setup m pmenmemenmenenmenenenenenmenenenenenenenenenemenmenenenemenennin 10 Connecting other audio OLIO cin compen meter MRT tre tn mU M QUU Terr etna naeenr ter enn RUN a keener a ere eee d ERO EM 35 Before using synchronization ZEE 11 Connecting additional amplifierS ss ssssrssrrenrrsnrusntnsntntkr nt rott rn ne eee ern on diua EID O UNDIM UA dm 35 About synchronized operations ZEB T1 Connecting the multichannel analog TRDUES ecetdeb iestokii abt potendo dax A a oid bri rib dl oet i artc Gud 36 S ea aa Foie or e nU T1 Connecting IW IVI apnteli gestisce macto Ehe mde bet etd Rune dla er onc sits dmt 36 About Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother LIK siessciehescavvateads ponds uva retta eere ap rd ert rx rt pterea 11 MULTEZONE Soi Dee A 37 Cautions on the Control with HDMI FUNCION ascscccnnsuinslnn oidsetuvs eri vaa enr oO e Cor cr certe rn 12 Connecting to the network through LAN interface euet edd qr teli abc Rte UV iau eit Pv bcn 40 Gonnecung opuonal et OCT ADAPTER miiran aA ritum Pond qu t pic ut Mu ped bata rM RR HDD 40 09 Using other functions Se At OC tmm 40 SCO AdO OO aena er Tee rt eee eee ee eee ee 74 US MVS a LT CS YC LE 41 Re HIG Bite ICO DVO EE LO Rie tana nat oh LOU LOTES 16 Commec ming aM Ty rIL COm ipa Glee e Tr 41 Sum esI see ee ee ee ee i cuu bos t nautas tc Mite iid tocadtceb cut eei u ra M bn 18 Connecting an HDMI equipped component to the front panel input sssssse mem
276. ss RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode 4 Press AUTO ALC DIRECT AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT to select AUTO SURROUND and start playback of the source If you re playing a Dolby Digital or DIS surround sound source you should hear surround sound If you are play ing a stereo source you will only hear sound from the front left right speakers in the default listening mode e You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver It should be set to output Dolby Digital DTS and 88 2 kHz 96 kHz PCM 2 channel audio and if there is an MPEG audio option set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM e See also Listening to your system on page 57 for information on different ways of listening to sources It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi channel playback is being performed prop erly For details see Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 119 When using surround speakers DODIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5 1 channel signals and DTS is displayed when playing DTS 5 1 channel signals If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode check the connections and settings 5 Use the VOLUME to adjust the volume level Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver A Note e The playback operation can be performe
277. sscsecenesereneenennenmsnmenmenmenne 45 Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACO ccciscissivsitorsindvedtnssipvapssvee asst ne ce atr etis 45 Diodes eda mamanak a m 4T Conte nts Operation Mode I RN 48 POUT C HONGEN M s 48 01 Before you start dice ebat 8 05 Basic playback Jdeqis seen T IET E A T E 8 Playing a Mad md c c c 0 M c M CMM M E 90 FAS TI VY eV secant act bse A E E E A E 51 pcd fc ERNEUT 8 Plavi USB dev 5 Installing the CAV OV d TTL 9 To a a atible d is eim Eos DE nosse di ess wen T I eee eee 53 Loading the JO 1 10 NUT OTT TTE 9 eying an POI VR ee OTS M Playing music from a a ER mE m 54 Operating range of 7 100 620 6 910 ES BUNTE Omm 10 CIMA MORD A A OOUL USING AVN VOOr ACI SUC ROI UM 10 eee MM pM NDUMIM M DS CC ML QOL LL OO ML Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of MUSIC siet nsi divi bue dud enhole bt e bi eb E etu idtm on eiit 55 02 Controls and displays 06 Listening to your system pias OUI OM aeea M HH 12 n Enjoying various types of playback using the listening ITiOtes icose ciis tre ee nen rec a c c cra 58 cal m eats cea ess ees a ea ve ees ad eA 14 Selecting MCEACG PESES seers EET 60 re URINE 15 CANOOSING TAE cle Jiao 6 orc ener terete OU Tom 60 03C ti t Berner sound Usno PNaSE CONTO peee E OO Im 61 onnee Ing your equipmen Better sound using Phase Control
278. stem amp Front Bi amping connection High quality surround amp ZONE 2 connection Multi Zone Speaker System setting 5 1ch Bi Amp ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy Bi amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5 2 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2 The selection of input devices is limited Front Bi Amp Main zone ZONE2 Sub zone G 5 2 channel surround system amp ZONE 2 ZONE 3 connection Multi Zone e Speaker System setting 5 1ch ZONE 2 3 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 2 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2 and ZONES The selection of input devices is limited Sub zone Main zone H 5 2 channel surround system amp Speaker B Bi amping connection Speaker System setting 5 1ch SP B Bi Amp With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5 2 channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers The B speakers can be bi amped to achieve high quality sound The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the SPEAKERS button For details see Switching the speaker terminals on page 78 Speaker B Bi Amp 1 5 2 channel surround system amp Front and Surround Bi amping connection High quality surround Speaker System setting 5 1ch F Surr
279. stereo ers from which sound is output For details see Switching the speaker terminals on page 78 playback of the same sound on the B speakers The same connections also allow for 9 2 channel surround sound in the main zone when not using the B speakers The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the SPEAKERS button For details see Switching A 9 2 channel surround system Front height Front wide connection ihe speaker terminei orni page Th Default setting JSBeS Ker SYSTEM BELIN ACN PELEN C 7 2 channel surround system amp Front Bi amping connection High quality surround e Speaker System setting 7 1ch Front Bi Amp Bi amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 7 2 channel surround sound Front Bi Amp A 9 2 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers L R the center speaker C the left and right front height speakers FHL FHR the left and right front wide speakers FWL FWR the left and right surround speakers SL SR the left and right surround back speakers SBL SBR and the subwoofers SW 1 SW 2 Itis not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height speakers and the front wide speakers This surround system produces a more true to life sound from above The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the SPEAKERS button For details see Switching the speaker terminals on page 78 D 7 2 channel surround system
280. system A setup e 7 1ch Speaker B Select to use the B speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room see Switching the speaker terminals on page 78 e 7 1ch Front Bi Amp Select this setting if you re bi amping your front speakers see Bi amping your speak ers on page 23 e 7 1ch ZONE 2 Select to use the front wide speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone see Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 79 e 7 1ch FH FW ZONE 2 Select to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone see Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 79 e 5 1ch Bi Amp ZONE 2 Select this to use the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone with the front speakers bi amped see Bi amping your speakers on page 23 e 5 1ch ZONE 2 3 Select to use the surround back ZONE 2 and front wide ZONE 3 speaker terminals for an independent systems in another zone see Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 79 e 5 1ch SP B Bi Amp Select this setting if you re bi amping your B speakers see Bi amping your speakers on page 23 e 5 1ch F Surr Bi Amp Select this setting if you re bi amping your front and surround speakers see Bi amping your speakers on page 23 e 5 1ch F C Bi Amp Select this setting if you re bi amping your front and center speakers see Bi amping your speakers on page 23 3 If you selected 9 1ch FH FW 7 1ch Speaker B 7 1ch
281. t Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human aural characteristics e f you re using THX speakers confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Channel Level Using the channel level settings you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system an important factor when setting up a home theater system 1 Select Channel Level from the Manual SP Setup menu The test tones will start 2 Adjust the level of each channel using Use f 4 to switch speakers Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted e f you are using a Sound Pressure Level SPL meter take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL C weighting slow reading 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu A Note e You can change the channel levels by press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode then press CH LEVEL and then using on the remote control Speaker Distance For good sound depth and separation from your system you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound 1 Select Speaker Distance from the Manual SP Setup menu
282. t D C Surround right Surround left Connecting your equipment About the audio connection Types of cables and terminals Transferable audio signals HD audio Digital Coaxial Conventional digital audio X D Digital Optical D K Sound signal priority m RCA Analog Conventional analog audio White Red e With an HDMI cable video and audio signals can be transferred in high quality over a single cable About the video converter The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through the HDMI OUT terminal If the TV is only connected to the receiver s composite VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks all the other video devices must be connected through composite connections If several video components are assigned to the same input function see Ihe Input Setup menu on page 47 the converter gives priority to HDMI component then composite in that order Terminal for connection Terminal for connection with source device with TV monitor HDMI IN HDMI OUT 000 COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 000 COMPONENT VIDEO IN 7 Note e The only exception is HDMI since this resolution cannot be downsampled you must connect your monitor TV to the receiver s HDMI output when connecting this video source If the video signal does not appear on your TV try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or dis play Note that some components such as video game units have reso
283. t the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting below if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely do the following e Press STANDBY ON on the front panel to turn off the power then turn the power back on e f the power cannot be turned off press and hold STANDBY ON on the front panel for over 10 seconds The power will turn off In this case the various settings made on the receiver may be cleared However settings made when the power was turned off normally are not cleared Power Symptom Remedy The power does not turn on Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet Try disconnecting from the power outlet then plugging back in Press the remote control s ZONE 2 ZONE 3 or ZONE 4 then press RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off Power cannot be turned off ZONE 2 ON ZONE 3 ON or ZONE 4 ON is displayed The receiver suddenly switches off or the iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires If so re attach the speaker wires making sure there are no stray strands The receiver may have a serious problem Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company During loud playback th
284. te onto your computer the file will be in ZIP format Unzip the ZIP file before saving it on the USB memory device If there are any old downloaded files or downloaded files for other models on the USB memory device delete them amp Important e DO NOT unplug the power cord during updating e When updating via the Internet do not disconnect the LAN cable When updating via a USB memory device do not disconnect the USB memory device If updating is interrupted before it is completed start updating over from the beginning e The receiver s settings may be reset when the software is updated Information on the models for which the settings are reset is provided on the Pioneer website Check the website before updating 1 Select Software Update from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the update procedure e Update via Internet he receiver checks whether updatable software is available via the Internet Update via USB Memory The receiver checks whether the USB memory device inserted into the USB port on the receiver s front panel contains updatable software Accessing is displayed and the update file is checked Wait a while 3 Checkon the screen whether or not an update file was found If New version found is displayed the update file has been found The version number and updating time are displayed If This is the latest version There is no need to update is displayed no update file has been found 4
285. the button on the front panel for the zone you want to operate ZONE 2 ON OFF ZONE 3 ON OFF or ZONE 4 ON OFF The zone switches between on and off each time the button is pressed The MULTI ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI ZONE control has been switched ON 2 Press MULTI ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the sub zone s you want e When the receiver is on make sure that any operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and your selected sub zone s show in the display If this is not showing the front panel controls affect the main zone only If the receiver is in standby the display is dimmed and ZONE and your selected sub zone s continue to show in the display 3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected For example ZONE 2 DVD sends the source connected to the DVD inputs to the primary ZONE 2 sub room e f you select TUNER you can use the tuner controls to select a preset station see Saving station presets on page 54 if you re unsure how to do this The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time Therefore changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast 4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone When Speaker System is set to anything other than 7 1ch ZONE 2 7 1ch FH FW ZONE 2 5 1ch Bi Amp ZONE 2 or 5 1ch ZONE 2 3 the volume ou
286. the player s operating instructions e See the Pioneer website for players supporting the Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link functions Sound Retriever Link When playing a compressed audio file on the player the file s bitrate information is acquired using the Control with HDMI function and the sound is optimized on the receiver based on this information To activate the Sound Retriever Link function make the setting below 1 Setthe HDMI Setup s Control to ON and set the Control Mode setting to ON See HDMI Setup on page 70 2 Set the S RTRV Auto Sound Retriever setting to ON oee Setting the Audio options on page 74 Control with HDMI function Stream Smoother Link Using the Control with HDMI function the receiver automatically detects whether a compressed video file is being played on the player and if so automatically activates the Stream Smoother function To activate the Stream Smoother Link function make the setting below 1 Set the HDMI Setup s Control to ON and set the Control Mode setting to ON See HDMI Setup on page 70 2 Set the STREAM Stream Smoother setting to AUTO See Setting the Video options on page 76 Cautions on the Control with HDMI function e Connect the TV directly to this receiver Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter such as an HDMI switch can cause operational errors e Only connect components Blu ray Disc player etc you intend to u
287. ting your equipment H 5 2 channel surround system amp Speaker B Bi amping connection e Select 5 1ch SP B Bi Amp from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 98 to do this Front left Front right Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 SURROUND FRONT WIDE suRRouND BACK EY R R Bi amp compatible speaker Speaker B left Bi amp compatible D G speaker Q d Speaker B right Surround right Surround left Connecting your equipment I 5 2 channel surround system amp Front and Surround Bi amping connection J 5 2 channel surround system amp Front and Center Bi amping connection High quality surround High quality surround e Select 5 1ch F Surr Bi Amp from the Speaker System menu e Select 5 1ch F C Bi Amp from the Speaker System menu See Speaker system setting on page 98 to do this See Speaker system setting on page 98 to do this Bi amp compatible speaker Bi amp compatible speaker Bi amp compatible speaker Bi amp compatible speaker Bi amp compatible speaker Front right Front left Front right Center Front left Subwoofer 1 Center Subwoofer 2 Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2 LINE LEVEL LINE LEVEL NPUT INPUT LINE LEVEL NPUT LINE LEVEL NPUT SURROUND sunRouuNp Back EY L R SURROUND SURROUND Back EE L Bi amp compatible speaker Surround left Bi amp compatible speaker 3 D E Surround righ
288. tions However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Caution To prevent fire hazard the Class 2 Wiring Cable should be used for connection with speaker and should be routed away from hazards to avoid damage to the insulation of the cable D3 7 13 67 A1 En Information to User Alterations or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user s right to operate the equipment D8 10 2 A1 En D8 10 1 2 A1 En WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with the product may expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defect or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling D36 P5 B1 En IMPORTANT NOTICE THE MODEL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER OF THIS EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE REAR OR BOTTO
289. to MCACC selected at Advanced MCACC or with ALL or Full Band Phase Ctrl selected when Auto MCACC is selected the graph before group delay calibration is also displayed When After is selected at Calibration the group delay after calibration is displayed Compared to when Before is selected with After there is less difference in the delay between frequency bands and the group delay between the different channels is uniform allowing you to check the full band phase control effect No Data is displayed if the selected group delay has not been measured The Advanced MCACC menu Data Management This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets allowing you to calibrate your system for different listen ing positions or frequency adjustments for the same listening position This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you re listening to and where you re sitting for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TV From this menu you can copy from one preset to another name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don t need e This can be done in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning Full Auto MCACC on page 45 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 90 either of which you should have already completed 1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control then press HOME MENU A Graphical User Interface GUI screen appears on your TV Use and ENTER to navi
290. to be entered must be defined within the following ranges If the IP address defined is beyond the following ranges you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations Class A 10 0 0 1 to 10 255 255 254 Glass B 172 16 0 1 to 172 31 255 254 Class C 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 255 254 Subnet Mask In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver enter the subnet mask pro vided by your ISP on paper In most cases enter 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway In case a gateway router is connected to this receiver enter the corresponding IP address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper enter it in the Primary DNS Server field In case there are more than two DNS server addresses enter Secondary DNS Server in the other DNS server address field Proxy Hostname Proxy Port This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the Proxy Hostname field Also enter the port number of your proxy server in the Proxy Port field 1 Select IP Address Proxy from the Network Setup menu 2 Select the DHCP setting you want When you select ON the network is automatically set up and you do not need to follow Steps 3 Proceed with Step 4 If there is no DHCP server on the network and you
291. to indicate the currently selected input signal AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input sig nal automatically page 60 2 Program format indicators Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are being input e L R Left front Right front channel e C Center channel e SL SR Left surround Right surround channel e LFE Low frequency effects channel the indicators light when an LFE signal is being input e XL XR Iwo channels other than the ones above XC Either one channel other than the ones above the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag 3 Digital format indicators Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected e OO DIGITAL Lights with Dolby Digital decoding DO DIGITAL PLUS Lights with Dolby Digital Plus decoding XI TrueHD Lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding e DTS Lights with DTS decoding e DTS HD Lights with DTS HD decoding e 96 24 Lights with DTS 96 24 decoding e DSD Lights during playback of DSD Direct Stream Digital signals e DSD PCM Light during DSD Direct Stream Digital to PCM conversion with SACDs e PCM Lights during playback of PCM signals e MSTR Lights during playback of DIS HD Master Audio signals 4 MULTI ZONE Lights when the MULTI ZONE feature is active page 9 5 FULLBAND Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on page 61 6 Listening mode indicators e AUTO SURROUND Lights when the Auto Surround featu
292. tput from the receiver s AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT ter minals can be fixed to 40 dB or 0 dB and the volume can be adjusted from the connected amplifier If you want to adjust the volume from the connected amplifier see ZONE Setup on page 103 5 When you re finished press MULTI ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls You can also press ZONE 2 ON OFF ZONE 3 ON OFF or ZONE 4 ON OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone e You won t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you ve switched off the MULTI ZONE control first e f you don t plan to use the MULTI ZONE feature for a while turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby Using other functions MULTI ZONE remote controls Press the remote control s ZONE 2 ZONE 3 or ZONE 4 to operate the corresponding zone The following table shows the possible MULTI ZONE remote controls Button s What it does Switches on off power in the sub zone INPUT SELECT Use to select the input function in the sub zone l Use to select the input function directly this may not work for some functions in the sub Input function buttons Zone NEUEM Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone a MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also lt a gt restores the sound a Thevolume cannot be adjusted on the receiver if Volume Level at ZONE 2 Setup under ZONE
293. tting will automatically be set to NO e Surr Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect surround speakers choose NO the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer e SB Select the number of surround back speakers you have one two or none Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect surround back speakers choose NO You can adjust this setting only when Speaker System setting is 9 1ch FH FW 7 1ch Speaker B 7 1ch Front Bi Amp or 7 1ch ZONE 2 l fthe surround speakers are set to NO the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO e SW LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO the bass frequencies are output from other speakers f you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer T
294. u can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 84 e With the TV CONTROL buttons the TV can be operated regardless of the input set for the remote control s operation mode When using one TV set we recommend assigning the same IV s preset codes to the TV CONTROL INPUT button and the TV button When using two TV sets for better convenience assign the TV connected to the MONITOR OUT terminals to the TV CONTROL INPUT button the other TV to the TV button e Devices may be assigned to the following input function buttons Selecting preset codes directly 1 Press and hold RCU SETUP then press 1 for three seconds Release the button after the LED flashes once The LED continues to flash e Tocancel the preset setup mode press RCU SETUP 2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control To assign the preset codes of the TV to be operated with the TV CONTROL function press the TV CONTROL INPUT button The LED blinks once and flashes continuously 3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4 digit preset code oee Preset code list on page 128 If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash the setting has been successfully completed When the preset code is fully input the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed If this hap pens enter the 4 digit preset code again 4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 f
295. u will return to the Other Setup menu Remote Control Mode Setup e Default setting 1 This sets this receiver s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver are being used 1 Select Remote Control Mode Setup from the Other Setup menu 2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want 3 Select OK to change the remote control mode 4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control s setting see Operating multiple receivers on page 83 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu Software Update Use this procedure to update the receiver s software and check the version There are two ways to update via the Internet and via a USB memory device Updating via the Internet is performed by accessing the file server from the receiver and downloading the file This procedure is only possible if the receiver is connected to the Internet Updating via a USB memory device is performed by downloading the update file from a computer reading this file onto a USB memory device then inserting this USB memory device into the USB port on the receiver s front panel With this procedure the USB memory device containing the update file must first be inserted into the USB port on the receiver s front panel e f an update file is provided on the Pioneer website download it onto your computer When downloading an update file from the Pioneer websi
296. uide Safety Brochure Warranty sheet 2 Note e Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements e This product includes FontAvenue fonts licensed by NEC Corporation FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation 121 Additional information Preset code list You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list but please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code amp Important e We do not guarantee the operations of all the manufacturers and devices listed Operation may not be possible even if a preset code is entered If you can t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control you can still teach the remote individual commands trom another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 84 TV Pioneer 0004 0006 0113 0233 0252 0275 0291 0305 Admiral 0001 0014 Adventura 0012 Aiwa 0002 Akai 0002 0100 Albatron 0097 Alleron 0009 America Action 0104 Amtron 0008 Anam 0104 Anam National 0003 0008 AOC 0004 0005 0006 0100 Apex 0021 0102 0106 Audiovox 0008 0104 Aventura 0103 Axion 0094 Bang amp Olufsen 0111 Belcor 0004 Bell amp Howell 0001 Benq
297. und back speaker place it directly behind you e Place the left and right front height speakers at least one meter 3 8 ft directly above the left and right front speakers THX speaker system setup If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer if your subwoofer has one or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer See also HX Audio Setting on page 100 to make the settings that will give you the best sound experience when using the Home THX modes page 59 Some tips for improving sound quality Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system e The subwoofer can be placed on the floor Ideally the other speakers should be at about ear level when you re listening to them Putting the speakers on the floor except the subwoofer or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended e For the best stereo effect place the front speakers 2 m to 3 m 6 ft to 9 ft apart at equal distance from the TV e f you re going to place speakers around your CRT TV use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a suffi cient distance from your CRT TV e f you re using a center speaker place the front speakers at a wider angle If not place them at a narrower angle e Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV
298. und effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer Using Stream Direct Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source All unneces sary signal processing is bypassed and you re left with the pure analog or digital sound source Processing differs depending on the input signal and whether or not surround back speakers are connected For details see Auto Surround ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 119 1 Press RECEIVER to the receiver operation mode 2 While listening to a source press AUTO ALC DIRECT AUTO SURR ALC STREAM DIRECT to select the mode you want Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed e AUTO SURROUND See Auto playback on page 58 e ALC Listening in Auto level control mode page 58 DIRECT Plays back sound from the source with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT With DIRECT the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by the MCACC sys tem and the Phase Control effect e PURE DIRECT Plays back unmodified sound from source with only minimal digital treatment e OPTIMUM SURR Listening in Optimum Surround mode page 58 e Note e When listening through headphones you can select ALC OPTIMUM SURR or PURE DIRECT mode only Listening to your system Selecting MCACC presets e Default setting MEM
299. unit and setting up from the computer and an Interactive Manual for operating the unit while reading the manual Also Operation Guide describes the receiver s playback operations and how to use several functions through videos and illustrations ANNavigator is not only included PC software but also iPad version in free download trom App Store For detail check the website http pioneer jp product soft iapp avnavi en html HDMI 3D Audio Return Channel A compatible component is required to use the above function e 4K Pass Through Displays 4K resolution video signals pass through on the display PQLS Bit stream Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS compatible player with HDMI connections This feature is only available when the connected Pioneer Blu ray Disc Player supporting the PQLS function Auto Phase Control Plus For discs created with standards other than Phase Control the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place This function automatically corrects tor phase shifting on such discs and broadcast This function is especially effective when playing music Hi bit 32 Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs DVDs or BDs 16 20 and 24 bit PCM as well as compressed audio is requantized to 32 bits and the high frequency component is interpolated upon data pro cessing to enable smoother more subtle musical expression Sound Retriever Link By co
300. ut Skip d Network Setup Audio In COAX 1 e HDMI Setup HDMI Input f Other Setup Componentin 12V Trigger 1 12V Trigger 2 Return a Exit Return 4 Select the input function that you want to set up The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel such as DVD or SAT CBL which in turn correspond with the names on the remote control 5 Select the input s to which you ve connected your component For example if your DVD player only has an optical output you will need to change the DVD input function s Audio In setting from COAX 1 default to the optical input you ve connected it to The numbering OPT 1 to OPT 2 corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the receiver 6 When you re finished proceed to the settings for other inputs There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks Input Name You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification Select Rename to do so or Default to return to the system default e Input Skip When set to ON that input is skipped when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT DVD and other inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons e 12V Trigger 1 2 After connecting a component to one of the 12 volt triggers see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 43 select MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 or OFF for the corre sponding t
301. vice perform the operation to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER e When the B uetooth ADAPTER is not plugged into the ADAPTER PORT No Adapter will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is selected 3 Start playback of music contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technology device This receiver s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on B uetooth wireless tech nology devices e Bluetooth wireless technology device should be compatible with AVRCP profile e Depending on the Bluetooth wireless technology device you use operation may differ from what is shown in the remote control buttons 4 While listening to a source set the remote control to the receiver operation mode then press ADV SURR repeatedly to select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners Air Jam Air Jam a Pioneer exclusive application and available for free Air Jam lets you connect multi compatible devices to this unit using Bluetooth wireless technology With it you can make a group playlist directly on a supported device to play in your home theater through the unit You and your friends can add songs from your devices to the playlist Also Air Jam lets you delete the song before anyone has to hear it 1 Press ADPT on the remote contr
302. vorites The address of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is http www radio pioneer com 1 Display the Internet Radio list screen To display the Internet Radio list screen perform step 1 at Playback with Network functions on page 65 2 Use f 4 to select Help then press ENTER 3 Use f 4 to select Get access code then press ENTER The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed Make a memo of this address The following can be checked on the Help screen e Get access code he access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed e Show Your WebID PW After registering on the special Pioneer Internet radio site the registered ID and password are displayed e Reset Your WebID PW Resets all the information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site When reset all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared If you want to listen to the same stations re register after resetting 4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the registration process http www radio pioneer com Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration following the instructions on the screen 5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites following the instructions on the computer s screen Both broadcast stations not on the vIuner list and
303. with this unit allows you to play and stop media and perform other operations e t must be necessary that the B uetooth wireless technology enabled device supports AVRCP profiles Remote control operations cannot be guaranteed for all B uetooth wireless technology enabled devices Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device Pairing must be done before you start playback of bluetooth wireless technology content using the B uetooth ADAPTER Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared The pairing step is necessary to register the b uetooth wireless technology device to enable b uetooth communi cations For more details see also the operating instructions of your B uetooth wireless technology device e Pairing is required when you first use the b uetooth wireless technology device and B uetooth ADAPTER e To enable bluetooth communication pairing should be done with both your system and B uetooth wireless technology device e Ifthe Bluetooth wireless technology device s security code is 0000 there is no need to make the security code setting on the receiver Press ADPT to set the ADAPTER PORT input then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device If pairing is successful there is no need to performing the pairing operation below e When using the AS BT200 only This unit complies with B uetooth Specifications Ve
304. wsonic 1017 Voodoo 1017 Wards 1002 1003 1004 1005 XR 1000 1004 1005 Yamaha 1000 1001 Zenith 1013 1018 ZT Group 1017 Technics 5041 Victor 5014 Yamaha 5024 5025 5038 5046 5047 Satellite Set Top Box Pioneer 6097 6098 6325 6328 6329 ADB 6035 6001 Akai 6102 Alba 6005 6011 6013 Allsat 6102 Alltech 6011 Amstrad 6033 6030 6044 Anttron 6013 Asat 6102 Austar 6000 6045 Bell ExpressVu 6002 6003 British Sky Broadcasting 6030 Canal 6105 Chaparral 6034 CNS 6001 Coolsat 6021 Crossdigital 6043 Digenius 6104 Digiwave 6053 DirecTV 6070 6110 6111 6062 6063 6113 6008 6038 6054 6069 6060 6059 6043 6018 6114 6115 6116 6093 Dish Network System 6002 6089 6003 6004 Dishpro 6002 6089 6004 Echostar 6002 6089 6036 6005 6003 6004 Expressvu 6002 6004 Fortec Star 6123 6023 Fresat 6014 Funai 6070 GE 6111 General Instrument 6032 GOI 6002 6004 Grundig 6007 6030 Hirschmann 6033 Hisense 6020 Hitachi 6038 6049 Houston 6002 HTS 6002 6004 Hughes Network Systems 6113 6038 6054 6114 6115 6116 Hyundai 6016 iLo 6020 Innova 6059 Jerrold 6032 Kathrein 6096 Lava 6053 LG 6047 6018 Marantz 6102 McIntosh 6032 Mitsubishi 6038 Motorola 6032 6042 NEC 6050 6131 Netsat 6059 Next Level 6032 nfusion 6015 Nokia 6025 6026 6118 6119 6121 Pace 6035 6005 6030 6031 Panarex 6016 Panasonic 6008 6009 6030 Pansat 6016 6022 Philips 6002
305. xis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps 5 If Advanced EQ Setup is selected select the MCACC memory to be stored then enter the desired time setting for calibration and then select START e To specify the place where the MCACC memory is to be stored press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store Based on the reverb measurement above you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement it is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers we recommend using the 30 50ms setting Use m w to select the setting Use f to switch between them Select the setting from the following time periods in milliseconds 0 20ms 10 30ms 20 40ms 30 50ms 40 60ms 50 70ms and 60 80ms This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration When you re finished select START It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set you are given the option to check the settings on screen Precision Distance SC 68 only Before using this function perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure see page 45 Performing the Full Auto MCACC procedure corrects the distance to a precision of 0 5 inch but the Precision Distance function lets you adjust the distan
306. y back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations you must turn on the DHCP server function of your router In case your router does not have the built in DHCP server function it is necessary to set up the network manually Otherwise you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations See Network Setup menu on page 100 for more on this Authorizing this receiver This receiver must be authorized to enable playback This happens automatically when the receiver makes a connection over the network to the PC If not please authorize this receiver manually on the PC The authorization or permission method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected For more information on authorizing this receiver refer to the instruction manual of your server Playback with NETWORK features Playback with Network functions amp Important e About one minute is required between turning the power on and completion of startup e When you play back audio files Connecting is displayed before playback starts The display may continue for several seconds depending on the type of file e n case a domain is configured in a Windows network environment you cannot access a PC on the network while you are logged onto the domain Instead of logging onto the domain log onto the local machine e There are cases where the time e
307. your hearing adapts ESTABLISH A SAFE LEVEL e Set your volume control at a low setting e Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly without distortion Once you have established a comfortable sound level set the dial and leave it there BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES Do not turn up the volume so high that you can t hear what s around you Use caution or temporarily discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations Do not use headphones while operating a motorized vehicle the use of headphones may create a traffic hazard and is illegal in many areas S001a A1 En FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Product Name AV Receiver Model Number SC 68 Responsible Party Name PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC SERVICE SUPPORT DIVISION Address 1925 E DOMINGUEZ ST LONG BEACH CA 90810 1003 U S A Phone 1 800 421 1404 URL http www pioneerelectronics com D8 10 4 C1 En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product Please read through these operating 04 Basic Setup instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly Changing the OSD display language OSD Language sse
308. ype is set to DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page components but not from digital 60 ones DVD LD CD etc Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to see The Input Setup menu on page 47 Check the digital output settings on the source component If the source component has a digital volume control make sure this is not turned down SC 68 only No sound is produced even if MULTI CH IN is selected No sound is output or a noise is out put when Dolby Digital DTS software is played back When 5 1ch F Surr Bi Amp or 5 1ch F C Bi Amp is selected in the Speaker System set tings when the center or surround speakers are bi amped no sound is produced even when MULTI CH IN is selected Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital DTS discs Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output settings of your BD or DVD player Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On If the source component has a digital volume control make sure this is not turned down No sound when using the Home Menu If the HDMI input function is selected sound is muted until exiting the Home Menu Other audio problems Symptom Remedy Speaker switching sound clicking sound is heard from receiver during playback Depending on the listening mode the front height or front wide and surround back speakers may switch automatically in funct

Pioneer SC-67 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents